JP2016013430A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: In the case of a normal game state, by using determination variation means, a second privilege game is more easily determined than a first privilege game by type determination means for a lottery to first information than for a lottery to second information. In the meantime, in the case of a special game state, by using the determination variation means, the second privilege game is more easily determined than the first privilege game by the type determination means for a lottery to the second information than for a lottery to the first information. When the normal game state is set by state setting means, a lottery of the first information stored in information storage means is held more preferentially by lottery means by setting using priority setting means. When the special game state is set by the state setting means, a lottery of the second information is held more preferentially by the lottery means by setting using the priority setting means.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a plurality of entrances, and whether or not the game is won based on the winning of a game ball at the entrance and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The symbol or the like shown is stopped and displayed. When winning is performed during the execution of the variable display, up to the upper limit number of winning information and the like used for determination of success / failure is stored in the reserved area. When the variable display is stopped, the next variable display is started based on the highest priority among the winning information in the holding area. The height of the priority is determined by the type of winning entrance and the winning order, and in the same type of entrance, the priority becomes higher in the order of winning. The winning information in the reserved area is moved to the execution area or the like when the change based on the winning information or the like is started.

  As described above, in a gaming machine having a plurality of entrances, there is a gaming machine that makes it easy for a player to understand the order in which variation starts, by determining the order in which variation display starts. It was proposed.

JP 2013-188368 A

  However, the variable display is monotonous that it is started in an order based on a predetermined priority, and there is a problem that it is not possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the player.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. Information acquisition means for acquiring first information based on having entered a mouth, and acquiring second information based on having entered a second entrance, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means Based on the first information or the second information, the lottery means for executing the lottery upon the establishment of the lottery condition, the first information acquired by the information acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the Information storage means capable of storing second information respectively, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means Special games that give special games that are advantageous to players State setting means for setting either a normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the state setting means When the normal gaming state is set according to the above, the gaming ball is set in a state where it is harder to enter the second entrance than in the first entrance, and the special gaming state is set. In addition, as a type of the bonus game given by the pitch assisting means set to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter the second entrance than the first entrance, and the privilege game granting means , A type determining means for determining one of a first award game and a second award game that is more advantageous to the player than the first award game; and in the normal gaming state, the second award Rather than lottery for information Thus, the second privilege game is more easily determined by the type determining means than the first privilege game, and the lottery for the second information is more than the lottery for the first information when in the special game state. On the other hand, when the normal game state is set by the determination variable means for making the second privilege game easier to be determined by the type determination means than the first privilege game and the state setting means, the information storage is performed. The first information stored in the means is preferentially set to be drawn by the lottery means, and when the special gaming state is set, the second information is given priority to the lottery means. And priority setting means for setting the lottery.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the entrance assisting means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first entrance and the second entrance to guide the game ball to the second entrance. A movable piece movable to the second state and variable means for changing the movable piece between the first state and the second state are provided.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the state When the normal gaming state is set by the setting means, the second entrance is set in a state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first entrance by the entrance assisting means, and is set in the special gaming state. In this case, the second entrance is set in a state where the game entrance is easier to enter than the first entrance by the entrance assisting means. As the type of privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, one of the first privilege game and the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is decided by the type determining means. . In the normal gaming state, the determination or piece means makes it easier for the type determination means to determine the second privilege game than the first privilege game for the lottery for the first information rather than the lottery for the second information. . On the other hand, when the game state is in the special game state, the type determination means determines the second privilege game rather than the first privilege game for the lottery for the second information rather than the lottery for the first information by the decision or one means. Made easier. When the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means, the priority setting means sets the first information stored in the information storage means so as to be drawn by the lottery means. Further, when the special game state is set by the state setting means, the priority setting means is set so that the second information is preferentially drawn by the lottery means.

  As a result, information that is preferentially varied depending on the gaming state can be varied. Therefore, a fresh game can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, in the entrance assisting means, the game ball is guided to the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the first state. On the other hand, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the second state. The movable piece is changed between the first state and the second state by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to easily enter the second entrance.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a judgment value per second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of these. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol 1. FIG. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol 2. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of big hit. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of a fluctuation | variation classification. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display of the holding symbol at the time of normal, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display of the holding symbol at the time of shortening, (c) is a special at the time of shortening It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display of the holding | maintenance symbol when the number of reservation balls of the symbol 2 decreases. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the variable execution determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the distribution unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 in 2nd Embodiment and the jackpot type in a special symbol, (b) is the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of RAM inside. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 big hit judgment processing which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the short time medium fluctuation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize) to be described later are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64 a, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64a, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and the ball enters the second entrance 64b. In such a case, the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a hit, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is opened, and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As will be described in detail later, the special symbol jackpot is determined by a dedicated lottery for each of the first special symbol jackpot and the second special symbol jackpot. If the first special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of jackpot A and jackpot B. When the second special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the three types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, and “jackpot C” (FIGS. 9A to 9B). reference). The specific winning opening 65a is opened as many times as the number of jackpot types. Further, after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 64b, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are three types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, and “Big Jack C”. When “Big jackpot A”, “Big jackpot B”, or “Big jackpot C” is reached, a special gaming state with the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot type is entered.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, specifically, the “big hit A” is a big hit (15R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 15 times, and the big hit game Later in the short-time gaming state (period in which the special symbol has a low probability, the normal symbol probability is set to a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory becomes long, and the number of times of opening is set large), the special symbol starts to change 100 times It is set 100 times as a period until it is done. “Big Bonus B” is a jackpot (15R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is opened 15 times, and after the jackpot game, a probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability of a special symbol is set to a high probability ( High probability game state) is given 100 times (the number of times of special symbol fluctuation). Further, the “big hit C” is a big hit (2R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened twice, and 100 chance games are given after the big hit game. In addition, “probable jackpot A” and “big jackpot B” are also given a short-time game state of a normal symbol during probability variation games. Also, “big hit A” and “big hit B” are until the opening time of one round of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. The “big hit C” is set until the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is 1 second or ten game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the present embodiment, a small hit different from the big win is set with a predetermined probability in the case of a loss. When winning a small win, the specific winning opening 65a is opened twice. The opening time of the specific winning opening 65a for one round of the specific winning opening 65a is set until 1 game ball or 10 gaming balls enter in the same manner as the “big hit C”. As described above, it is difficult for the player to identify “big hit C” and “small win” from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, since “big hit C” and “small hit” are notified in the state (main chance) that the main symbol of “341” is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display the special symbol (third It is difficult to identify from the design. Further, the special symbol (first symbol) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is an LED or 7-segment display that is difficult for the player to identify, and is configured so that the jackpot type is difficult to distinguish. Yes.

  In addition, since a short-time game is not set after “big hit C” and “small hit”, it is difficult to identify whether it was “big hit C” or “small hit” in subsequent games. Thereby, even if the player is “small hit”, the game can be performed with the expectation that the “big hit C” is executed and the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state. . Thereby, the malfunction which a player gets tired of a game in the period until "big hit AC" is performed can be suppressed.

  Here, the “special symbol probability change gaming state (high probability state)” means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability has increased, so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol probability change), in other words, special symbol It is a game state that is easily shifted to the game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is referred to as a “normal game state of a special symbol (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. The jackpot probability indicates a normal state (a normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, and the Riu electric character is a game ball provided along with the second entrance 64b. Is a game state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the short time period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds at the jackpot according to the jackpot type Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery ends three times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed six times after the end, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the" big hit C "ends. The short state may be continued at this time.

  Furthermore, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the second entrance 64b or the electric symbol is released at one normal symbol hit. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become. Instead of the special symbol lottery count, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is newly made by the time the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot ends, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed after the jackpot of the new special symbol is over. The lottery is continued until 100 lotteries are completed. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further changed to the new symbol. It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, until at least 102 lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lottery performed after the new jackpot are finished, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “normal symbol short-time state” is further increased to the new jackpot. It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entry (start winning prize) to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is being executed. A variation display is performed, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation ends, or the first entrance port 64a or the second entrance port 64b. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the ball, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81, and even when the ball enters the second entrance 64b, the number of entrances is a maximum of four times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the entrance to the 1st entrance 64a and the 2nd entrance 64b could be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension was limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is jackpot A or jackpot B, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the jackpot type. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds of jackpots in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. In the case of a big hit C, a chance eye composed of “341” breaks is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance chance is one type of “341”, but is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other random eyes, or one of the reach misses may be set as the chance eye. Good.

  Variation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the special symbol set as priority is changed based on the priority set in the gaming state. Is set. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state other than the normal symbol is set to the short-time gaming state (the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state in which the short-time state is not set (100 times after jackpot C)), the first special symbol of Variation is prioritized. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the variation of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set so that only 15 rounds of jackpot are selected, and the second special symbol is selected. Then, it is set so that the jackpot of two rounds is selected with a probability of 40%. As a ratio of jackpots to shift to the high probability gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 80% respectively, and are configured at the same rate.

  Therefore, the first special symbol is set so that the jackpot advantageous to the player is more easily selected than the second special symbol. Therefore, when a big hit is made in a gaming state other than the short-time gaming state, which is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, the first special symbol variation is preferentially executed so that a lottery advantageous to the player is executed. It is comprised so that. In addition, when the game state is set to the short-time game state that is advantageous to the player, the variation of the second special symbol that is a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is preferentially executed. Yes.

  With this configuration, in a gaming state unfavorable to the player, a lottery game advantageous to the player (a lot of profit on the jackpot) can be easily obtained, and the player's damage becomes excessive. It is comprised so that it can suppress. Also, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is easy to get a big win in a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player (less profit on the jackpot), and the damage on the game store side becomes excessive or gambling Is configured so as to be able to suppress a problem that becomes extremely high.

  In the present embodiment, if the game ball is continuously being fired, the game ball for 1000 yen (250 shots) is about 17 to 20 times, the first entrance 64a or the second entrance. A game nail or the like is arranged so that it can enter the ball opening 64b (when a prize ball paid out by winning a prize at the first ball entry opening 64a or the second ball entry opening 64b is also used). In the normal gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol is set so that a relatively long variation time (variation pattern such as reach) is easily selected. The game is configured to be easily played in the stored state, and even when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is stored, the variable display for the held ball is not started. Thereby, although the game state is unfavorable to the player, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the disadvantage that is disadvantageous to the player is suppressed.

  In the short-time gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time (30 seconds) (3 seconds). ) And the number of times of opening (2 times) are set to be larger than the opening time (0.5 seconds) and the number of times of opening (1 time) in normal times. In order to launch a game ball so that the game ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a left route through which the game ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a variable The right side of the display unit 80 is composed of two types, the right route through which the game ball passes, and a gate 67 is provided on both routes for the game ball as a trigger for starting a normal symbol. As a result, during the short-time gaming state, no matter how the game balls are fired, the normal symbol lottery is started, and the game balls are placed in the second entrance 64b rather than the first entrance 64a. Easy to enter the ball. Therefore, even during the short-time game, it is possible to suppress fraud that makes it possible to make a more advantageous jackpot by making a lottery with only the first special symbol.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, the game ball is easily inserted into the second entrance 64b, so that a prize ball equivalent to the launched game ball is easily paid out. The second entrance 64b It is designed to be a disadvantage to the player if it is not allowed to enter. Therefore, the player can inevitably play a game so as to enter the second entrance 64b, and can make it difficult to notice that the game is preferentially played with an unfavorable special symbol.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the second entrance 64b and the number of prize balls to be paid out increases, so that the game store can play game balls at the gate 67 in order to increase profits. It is conceivable to set the game nail so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 64b even when the game nail is set so that it is difficult for the player to pass through or when the electric accessory is activated. . However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 64b during the short-time game, the first special symbol is likely to start to change. Since the probability that the jackpot is determined to be 40 is high, even if there is a small fluctuation in the first special symbol, the jackpot will be determined by the first special symbol. Thereby, it becomes difficult for the game store side to adjust the game nail so as to make it difficult to enter the second entrance 64b, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that becomes an excessive disadvantage to the player. By configuring in this way, during the short-time game, even when the design is made with an effect that is assumed to be always drawn by the second special symbol, the effect is not performed as designed by the adjustment of the game store. Defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a secondary display area Ds for displaying the number of balls held.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are reserved balls that are the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. This is the area for displaying numbers. Specifically, in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls of special symbols set to be changed with priority is displayed, and in the small area Ds2, the reserved special symbols set to non-priority are displayed. The number of balls is displayed.

  Although the details will be described later, an ending display indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed, and is set after the jackpot game at the end timing of the ending display (specifically, the timing from the end of the ending until the start of the next special symbol change) The display position of the holding ball is varied based on the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is “white circle symbol (see FIG. 4A)” so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other. The reserved sphere of the second special symbol is displayed as “white triangle symbol (see FIG. 4A)”.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls set as priority is two or less, non-priority reserved symbols are displayed blinking (see FIG. 12C), and the non-priority reserved symbols vary. It is configured to notify the player that there is a risk of starting. By configuring in this way, even if the player is playing a game without noticing the state where the player has not fired the game ball due to a broken piece of the upper plate or a clogged ball, the failure can be notified, It is possible to suppress a lottery with special symbols that are disadvantageous to the player.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2 of the corresponding sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the reserved ball of the second entrance 64b is set in the same manner as the first entrance 64a.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are synchronized with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Each value is stored separately. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first random number table 202a (FIG. 8B) includes a first per random number table 202a for low probability and a first per random number table 202 for high probability. The number of random numbers that are included in the jackpot is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is low and the first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is high are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball has won the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 8B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 29” is the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b) for high probability. ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIGS. 9A to 9B). As shown in FIG. 9A, when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2. Becomes “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type of is “Big Jack A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 59” is “jackpot B”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot C”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64a and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 10B to 10D) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 10B to 10D) includes, for example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disengagement (for a short time)”, “discovery normal reach” as variation patterns for removal. ”,“ Outgoing Super Reach ”,“ Outgoing Special Reach ”are stipulated, and the variation patterns for jackpots are“ Normal Normal Reach ”,“ Per Super Reach ”, and“ Perch Special Reach ”. Yes. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 10A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number that is the winning set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 10A) matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is won. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64a is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64a is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64a is opened “2 times per second”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64a is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64a is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is immediately input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Special symbol 2 held ball counter 203e, normal symbol held ball counter 203f, pre-reading probability changing counter 203g, hour / short counter 203h, counter buffer 203i, variation execution flag 203j, and other memory areas (see FIG. Not shown).

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (first special symbol), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64a, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big special lottery drawing of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 has a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the first entrance port 64a ( The only difference is that the first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time the ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value is 8. 1 is added (see S604 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S206 in FIG. 14).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S207 in FIG. 14 and S605 in FIG. 18). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the corresponding small area Ds1 or small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 64b (second special symbol). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the first entrance (first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol). However, since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the processing of S610 in FIG. 18, and is subtracted by 1 each time a special symbol variation display is executed (see S211 in FIG. 14). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S212 in FIG. 14 and S611 in FIG. 18). ).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol normal display (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S904 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S805 in FIG. 20).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S905 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S903 in FIG. 21: No).

  The pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (a high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is set to zero, and the main controller 110 closes the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the final round of the jackpot (that is, the jackpot end timing). Is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot type. Specifically, 0 is set for “big hit type A”, and 100 is set for “big hit type B” and “big hit type C”. Thereafter, while the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S710 in FIG. 19).

  When the MPU 201 executes the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 16) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 17), a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, the value of the pre-reading probability variation counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to zero. In the main controller 110, the timing for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the final round of jackpot A and jackpot B (that is, jackpot) A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set in (end timing). Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” and “big hit type B”, and 0 is set for “big hit type C”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / short counter 203h becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 14).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on the second random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203h is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per-random number table for the low probability (see S810 and S811 in FIG. 20).

  The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. This flag is an area that is backed up even when power is interrupted, and the first special symbol is preferentially set in the initial state where the RAM is cleared.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. Yes.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. In the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, a small hit determination value is set to “30 to 39”. On the other hand, no small hit determination value is set in the first hit random number table 202a for low probability.

  As a result, in the normal gaming state in which the first special symbol is preferentially changed, it is possible to prevent the small win from being established, and it becomes easy to identify that the winning two rounds are the small hit. Can be suppressed. Also, in the short time in the probabilistic gaming state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed, it is easy to win a big hit C. Therefore, by setting to win a small hit, it is a big hit C or small It can be difficult to identify whether or not it is a win, and the player can play for a longer time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8C) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type. . As shown in FIG. 8C, the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 dedicated to the first special symbol (see FIG. 9A) and a special symbol 2 dedicated to the second special symbol. And a selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 9B).

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected, respectively, and the value “1” of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the judgment value for the big hit A. “0-19” is set as “20-99” as the judgment value of jackpot B. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is set so that a big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C can be selected, respectively. The counter C2 value “0-19” is set as a jackpot B determination value “20-59” and a jackpot C determination value “60-99”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10A) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened “1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 8D) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10 (b)) when the judgment result is a jackpot, and a judgment of success / failure. If the result is out of play and the game state is normal, a dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10C) and the result of the determination of whether or not the result is out of order and the game state is probable game state. Each (variable) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) is at least configured. In addition, although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table for a short-time gaming state is set.

  Returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start flag 223d are displayed. And a stop type selection flag 223e are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64a, or variation display in a special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 36). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the corresponding small region Ds1 or small region Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the corresponding small area Ds1 or small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 changes while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Can be made. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held. As to whether to display the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2, when the big hit start command is received from the main controller 110, the type of the big hit is determined. Then, a command indicating the hold display position is output to the display control device 114 (S1618 in FIG. 28). In addition, when a short time end command is received, a command indicating the hold display position command is output (S1620 in FIG. 28). The display control device 114 is controlled to set the hold display position without changing until the hold display position command is output. When the power is cut off, a command indicating the hold display position in accordance with the current gaming state is set as an initial setting command by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control device 113. And the display control device 114 is also instructed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the hold display position when the power is turned on (not shown).

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 31). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 31). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Since the details of the display control device 114 are already known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG. 12 shows the case where the display position of the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed when the priority in the change of the special symbol is changed, and the reserved ball number is equal to or less than the predetermined ball number (this embodiment) It is the figure which showed the aspect by which the display mode of a non-priority reservation symbol is changed and displayed when it becomes 2 or less in a form).

  FIG. 12 (a) is a diagram showing a reserved symbol in a gaming state other than the short time gaming state in which the first special symbol is preferentially changed. The reserved symbol “white circle” of the first special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, and the reserved symbol “white triangle” of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the state shifts to the short-time gaming state and the second special symbol is preferentially started to change. The reserved symbol “white triangle” of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, and the reserved symbol “white circle” of the first special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2. The display is switched by the display control device 114 at the timing when the ending at the end of the jackpot ends. The display control device 114 outputs a command (display hold display position replacement command for display) indicating the hold display position according to the jackpot type based on the fact that the sound lamp control device 113 has received the jackpot start command. Thus, the hold display position can be determined in advance.

  FIG. 12C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is two in the short-time gaming state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol set as priority becomes 2 or less, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol set as non-priority is blinked and displayed. Thereby, it can alert | report that there exists a possibility that the 2nd special symbol set non-priority by the player may be started to fluctuate. Therefore, the player can check whether or not the game ball is normally launched, and if the game ball is not normally launched due to a clogged ball or a broken ball, take measures to recover it. be able to. Note that this non-priority reserved symbol blinking display is similarly executed for the second special symbol when the first special symbol is set to be prioritized.

  In the present embodiment, the non-priority special symbol blinks when the number of priority reserved balls is two or less, both when the first special symbol is prioritized and when the second special symbol is prioritized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition of the number of reserved balls to be displayed in a blinking manner may be set differently depending on the type of special symbol set with priority. Specifically, when the first special symbol is given priority, the number of reserved balls is two or less, and when the second special symbol is given priority, the number of reserved balls is one or less. The mouth 64a takes time to enter the ball in the normal gaming state (compared to the second entrance 64b in the short time), so by giving an early notice, there is enough time to deal with the player Can be given. On the other hand, since the second entrance 64b in the short time is relatively easy for game balls to enter, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the notification is generated frequently by delaying the notification timing.

  In the present embodiment, the notification mode blinks the non-priority reserved symbols, but is not limited to this, and the priority reserved symbols may blink, or both the priority and non-priority reserved symbols blink. Of course, other notification modes such as notification by text or voice may be used.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 to 25. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of times of holding N2) is acquired (S203). Next, a change execution determination process is performed in which it is determined whether the change sphere is executed with the reserved sphere of the special symbol 1 or the hold sphere of the special symbol 2 and the change execution flag 203j is set (S204). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process is the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205). If it is not the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205: No) ), It is determined whether or not the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in FIG. 2 (S210). If the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution (2) in FIG. 2 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206) and is changed by the calculation. The reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S205, if the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in FIG. S210) If the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same process as the process for the special sphere 1 reserved sphere described above is performed for the special sphere 2 reserved sphere. Do.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. 2 Fluctuation start processing is executed (S214). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 16 or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, the stop symbol of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is set. More specifically, when the special symbol 1 is a big hit, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, the special symbol 2 is a big hit In this case, it is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, the special symbol display (the result of the current lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S219), a jackpot start command is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S225.

  The jackpot start command set in the process of S220 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114 (see S1614 in FIG. 28) and also displays a display hold display position replacement start command to the display control device 114. Transmit (see S1615 in FIG. 28). Upon receiving the display hold display position replacement start command, the display control device 114 displays a display based on the number of held balls of the special symbol 1 on Ds2, and displays a display based on the number of held balls of the special symbol 2 on Ds1. Swap so that.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S221), and the hour / minute counter 203h When it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour / middle counter 203h is 0 (S221: No), the process from S222 to S224 is skipped and the process proceeds to S225.

  In the process of S223, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S223), and if it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is 0 (S223: Yes), a time reduction end command is issued. The setting is made (S224), and the process proceeds to S225. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour / middle counter 203h is not 0 (S223: No), the process of S224 is skipped and the process proceeds to S225.

  In the process of S225 executed after the process of S220, S221, S223, or S224, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217 and the third symbol display A stop command is set to synchronize the variable stop of the device 81 (S225).

  Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is used. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variable execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting the variable execution flag to 0 (S301), and it is determined whether the time is running short (S302). If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more and it is determined that the hour / hour counter is shorter (S302: Yes), the change in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is executed with priority.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S303). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S303: Yes), the fluctuation execution flag 203j is set to the fluctuation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S304), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S303: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 ( S305). If the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0, the fluctuation execution flag 203j is set to fluctuation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S306), and this process is terminated. If the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is 0 (S305: No), there is no suspended ball to be subjected to variation execution, and thus this processing is terminated while the variation execution flag 203j remains in the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 and it is determined that the hour / hour counter is not shorter (S302: No), the change in the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is executed with priority.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S307). If the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S307: Yes), the variation execution flag 203j is set to the variation execution (1) in the special diagram 1 (S308), and this process is terminated. . On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S307: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 ( S309). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0, the fluctuation execution flag 203j is set to fluctuation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S310), and this process is terminated. If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S309: No), since there is no reserved ball to be changed and executed, this processing is ended while the change execution flag 203j is in the initial state.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, each of the big hit determination result of the special symbol 1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3. A value is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the jackpot determination result of the special symbol 1 acquired by the process of S401 is a jackpot of the special symbol 1 (S402). If it is determined in the process of S402 that the special symbol 1 is a big hit (S402: Yes), the display mode for the big win is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401. (S403).

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b, and 2 It is determined what type of jackpot is out of jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) of special symbols. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is determined that the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “20 to 99”, the jackpot B (15R probability variation big hit) is determined (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S403, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S404). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S404, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10B). Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 1”, special reach, if it is in the range of “2 to 7”, super reach, and if in the range of “8 to 24”, normal reach. A variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S402, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S402: No), a display mode of out is set (S405). In the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the above. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out”, and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S406). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S404, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time.

  When the processing of S404 or S406 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S404 or S406 is set (S407). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 or S406 is set (S408). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1201 of the main processing (FIG. 24). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S408 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 variation start process, as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 jackpot determination result obtained by the processing of S501 is a special symbol 2 jackpot. (S501) When it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is determined, the jackpot display mode is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501 (S503). The specific content is similar to the setting of the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) (S403), according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) 1 The display mode of the symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set, and the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) is set as the stop type. In the present embodiment, the process of S503 is set using the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, which is different from the special figure 1 selection table used in the special symbol 1 jackpot display mode setting (S404). However, it may be set using the same table.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202d2 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S504), and the process proceeds to S507.

  On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out (S502: No), the display mode of out is set (S505). The specific content is the same as the setting (S405) of the display mode out of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209).

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  When the processing of S504 or S506 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the variation pattern determined in S504 or S506 is set (S507). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S504 or S506 is set (S508). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1201 of the main processing (FIG. 24). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S508 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64a (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball inlet 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64a (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  If there is no winning at the first entrance 64a (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S603: No), the process proceeds to S607. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is acquired (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

  In the process of S607, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 64b (S607). If it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64b (S607: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is processed in the same manner as when the first entrance 64a is won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S608), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S609: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S610), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S611). Then, the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S612), and the process proceeds to S613.

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 64b (S607: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S609: No), the process proceeds to S613.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the prefetching process of S613 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S613). This prefetch process (S613) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 18).

  In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S701). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S701: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is pre-reading probability change (S702). ), If the gaming state is in the pre-reading probability change (S702: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (S703), S705 Move on to processing. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 8B) at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a. A determination is made by comparing the value (win value) being made one by one (S703). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 39”, it is determined to be a small hit, and “40 to 399”. If it is within the range, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 8B).

  On the other hand, in the process of S702, if the gaming state is not a prefetch probability change (S702: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a (S704). ), The process proceeds to S705. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 8B) at the low probability of the first per-random number table 202a. A determination is made by comparing the value (win value) being made one by one (S703). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 2”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “3 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 8B). ).

  In the processing of S705, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S705). . Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S706), and the process proceeds to S707.

  After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol by the processing of S703 or S704, the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above If each value of the counter C3 is a winning of the first entrance 64a, the first area among the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S705). If the winning is for the second entrance 64b, it is stored in the first area among the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704 is set (S706). The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the jackpot determination result from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a, which is used for pre-reading effect processing and the like. To do.

  After the winning information command is set in the process of S706, it is determined whether the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704 is a special symbol jackpot (S707). When the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704 is a special symbol jackpot (S707: Yes), a value corresponding to each jackpot type is set in the prefetching probability changing counter 203g (S708), and this processing is performed. finish. The value setting corresponding to each jackpot type is to set 0 for jackpot A and 100 for jackpot B or jackpot C. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704 is out of the special symbol (including the small bonus) (S707: No), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0 ( If the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0 (S709), the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S710), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S709: No), the process of S710 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64a. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S801). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64a is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S804: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S805).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h in the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S808). The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / hour state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S808: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S808: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S809). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S809: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64a is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64a as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64a, the first winning opening 65a is limited even if the first winning opening 64a is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64a during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the entrance 64a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S809, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S809: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S807. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S810). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S808, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S808: No), the process proceeds to S811. In the process of S811, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S807 is low. Based on the second per random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S811). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S810 or S811 is a normal symbol win (S812). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S812: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S813). In the process of S813, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S814). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S814: Yes), the current present is the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S815). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S815: Yes), the process proceeds to S817. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64a as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where it is out of the normal symbol In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S815, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S815: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64a is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S816), and the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S814, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S814: No), the process proceeds to S817. In the process of S817, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64a is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S817), and the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S812, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S812: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S818). In the process of S818, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S819, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S819), and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S819: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S820), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S819: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S821), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a.

  In the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S822). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S820 or the process of S821 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S822 (S822: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S822 (S822: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823). In the process of S823, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S813, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S818, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S823, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the process of S813 or S818.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S824). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S824: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64a is set (S825), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S825, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or S817 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S824, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S824: No), the process of S825 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the normal entrance 67, and when the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S903).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S903: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S904). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S905), and this process ends. In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104). If it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1112 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S1112 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1112, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1105: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1110, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1201 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1210 and S1211 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the voice lamp control device receives the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) and the start winning process (see FIG. 18) and the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 18). 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the jackpot start command, the time reduction end command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14), the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25), and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. . In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1204). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. This jackpot end setting includes the setting of the start of the special variable period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in rounds other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1204) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64a is executed (S1205). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1206). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 16) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 17), a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 16) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 17) ends, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S820 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 20) or the processing of S821, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S823 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S813 or S818 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes after S1201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1209: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main process execution timing is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1210, S1211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1210). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1202 (S1211).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1208, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the power-off process after S1212 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1212), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1213). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1214), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1215), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1208 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1207, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1210 and S1211 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1204). This jackpot control process (S1204) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 24). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being jackpoted (S1301). Specifically, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) S219 is executed, and if the special symbol jackpot start is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1301, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1302). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1302: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1303), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1304). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1302 (S1302: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1305). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1305: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1305: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1306), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning award (large opening) 65a this time is for the final round (that is, whether or not all the big hit rounds have ended) (S1307).

  When it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1307: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1308), and values corresponding to the jackpot are set in various counters. It sets (S1309). That is, by setting 100 in the hour / short counter 203h, the normal symbol is set in a high probability state (short time state) from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. After setting various counter values, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1307: No), S1308 and S1309 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

  In this way, when the short-time gaming state is set, the second special symbol is set to be changed with priority. As a result, in the non-short-time gaming state disadvantageous to the player, the lottery is preferentially executed with the first special symbol in which the lottery advantageous to the player is executed, and the short-time and middle-time gaming state advantageous to the player Then, it can be configured that a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player (a lottery type with a small number of prize balls obtained in the case of a jackpot is easily selected) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a balance in which the player's profit and the game shop's profit are not excessive.

  In the present embodiment, if the game ball is continuously being fired, the game ball for 1000 yen (250 shots) is about 17 to 20 times, the first entrance 64a or the second entrance. A game nail or the like is arranged so that it can enter the ball opening 64b (when a prize ball paid out by winning a prize at the first ball entry opening 64a or the second ball entry opening 64b is also used). In the normal gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol is set so that a relatively long variation time (variation pattern such as reach) is easily selected. The game is configured to be easily played in the stored state, and even when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is stored, the variable display for the held ball is not started. Thereby, although the game state is unfavorable to the player, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the disadvantage that is disadvantageous to the player is suppressed.

  In the short-time gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time (30 seconds) (3 seconds). ) And the number of times of opening (2 times) are set to be larger than the opening time (0.5 seconds) and the number of times of opening (1 time) in normal times. In order to launch a game ball so that the game ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a left route through which the game ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a variable The right side of the display unit 80 is composed of two types, the right route through which the game ball passes, and a gate 67 is provided on both routes for the game ball as a trigger for starting a normal symbol. As a result, during the short-time gaming state, no matter how the game balls are fired, the normal symbol lottery is started, and the game balls are placed in the second entrance 64b rather than the first entrance 64a. Easy to enter the ball. Therefore, even during the short-time game, it is possible to suppress fraud that makes it possible to make a more advantageous jackpot by making a lottery with only the first special symbol.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, the game ball is easily inserted into the second entrance 64b, so that a prize ball equivalent to the launched game ball is easily paid out. The second entrance 64b It is designed to be a disadvantage to the player if it is not allowed to enter. Therefore, the player can inevitably play a game so as to enter the second entrance 64b, and can make it difficult to notice that the game is preferentially played with an unfavorable special symbol.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the second entrance 64b and the number of prize balls to be paid out increases, so that the game store can play game balls at the gate 67 in order to increase profits. It is conceivable to set the game nail so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 64b even when the game nail is set so that it is difficult for the player to pass through or when the electric accessory is activated. . However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 64b during the short-time game, the first special symbol is likely to start to change. Since the probability that the jackpot is determined to be 40 is high, even if there is a small fluctuation in the first special symbol, the jackpot will be determined by the first special symbol. Thereby, it becomes difficult for the game store side to adjust the game nail so as to make it difficult to enter the second entrance 64b, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that becomes an excessive disadvantage to the player. By configuring in this way, during the short-time game, even when the design is made with an effect that is assumed to be always drawn by the second special symbol, the effect is not performed as designed by the adjustment of the game store. Defects can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 31, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-off process in S1516 (see FIG. 27) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 27), it executes a power-off process in S1516. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1516 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1516 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1516, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1402: Yes), the current ramp-up process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process in S1516, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 27). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1516 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1411, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S1409 is that when the process from S1404 to S1406 is reached via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes in S1502 to S1510. In S1501, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not, because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effects), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variation display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1508 described later are set (S1503), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1505, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamps (Ds1, Ds2) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1507 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510), and the process proceeds to S1511. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1511, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1512 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1515), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). This command determination processing (S1511) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S 1511), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1602), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1603), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. If a variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 31) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The variable display hold count N1) in the symbol 1 or the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e (the variable display hold count N2 in the special symbol 2) is extracted, and this is extracted as the special symbol 1 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. It is stored in the number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S1608). In the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set.

  Here, since the ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1608. The value of 223c can be matched with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, a reserved ball number effect process for performing an effect based on the reserved ball number is executed (S1609). After the process of S1609 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the reserved ball number effect process (S1609) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number effect process (S1609). The reserved ball number effect process (S1609) is a process for performing an effect based on the reserved ball number extracted from the reserved ball number command received from the main controller 110 as described above.

  In the reserved ball number effect process (S1609), first, a display reserved ball number command is issued based on the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Set (S1701). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is short (S1702). Specifically, it is determined that the gaming state is being shortened from the time of receiving the jackpot start command from the main control device to the reception of the time reduction end command. The determination as to whether or not the gaming state is short may be configured by transmitting a command indicating that the time is short from the main control device, and may be determined based on whether or not the command is received.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1702 that the time is short (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is 2 or less (S1703). When it is determined that the value of N2 is 2 or less (S1703: Yes), a display command for blinking and displaying the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is set (S1704). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1703 that N2 is a value greater than 2 (S1703: No), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the non-priority reserved symbols are automatically set to the normal display mode when the number of reserved balls with priority variation becomes three or more in the processing of S1701. However, in the process of S1703, when it is determined that the value of N2 is greater than 2 (S1703: No), the blinking display of the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be canceled. Even when the first special symbol is prioritized, a command for canceling the blinking display of the second special symbol may be similarly set when it is determined No in the processing of S1705.

  In addition, the display control device 114 automatically sets a display data table in which all of the combination patterns of the reserved symbols (the combination patterns of the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are stored, and the priority variation is set. In the case where the number of reserved items is two or less, display data for blinking non-priority reserved symbols may be set in advance. By setting in this way, it is possible to omit the control for setting or canceling the blinking display by determining the number of holding by the sound lamp control device 113 or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that the time is not short (S1702: No), it is determined whether the value of N1 is 2 or less (S1705). When it is determined that the value of N1 is 2 or less, a display command for blinking the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1706). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1705 that the value of N1 is greater than 2, this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. In the process of S1607, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1610). When the winning information command is received (S1610: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1611). The effect process is executed (S1612), and the process returns to the main process. In the process of S1611, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Details of the prefetch effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 64b, the value of the counter C1 is acquired by the main controller 110, and is acquired. The special symbol jackpot lottery is performed according to the values of the counter C1 and the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g, and the jackpot determination result is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. When the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and when the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is 0, special for low probability A special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the symbol jackpot random number table. When the main controller 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result obtained by prefetching is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. Note that the jackpot determination result of the special symbol obtained by prefetching is only a prediction, and may be provided separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery.

  Here, the prefetch effect process (S1612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect process (S1612). This pre-reading effect process (S1612) is a process for performing an effect based on the winning information extracted from the winning information command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  In the pre-reading effect process (S1612), first, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted from the received winning information command is a jackpot (S1801). When it is determined that the winning information is a jackpot (S1801: Yes), a one-notification effect for notifying the jackpot is set (S1802), and this process is terminated. With the setting of the one-shot notification effect, a sound for notifying the jackpot is output in the processing of S1509. It should be noted that, based on the setting of the one notification notification effect, the jackpot may be notified by the lamp output by the lamp output process of S1503, or a command corresponding to the one notification notification effect is provided in the RAM 223. In the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 27) that is stored in the command transmission ring buffer and executed by the MPU 221, it is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114, so that it is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. The jackpot may be notified by performing a display indicating that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1801 that the winning information is not a big hit (S1801: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the command determination process (S1511).

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1610 (S1610: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1613). When the jackpot start command is received (S1613: Yes), the display jackpot effect start command is set (S1614), the display hold display position replacement start command is set (S1615), and the process is terminated. . The display jackpot effect start command and the display hold display position replacement command set here are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and are output by the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221. In the process (S1502), it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot presentation start command, the display control device 114 starts the jackpot presentation at the third symbol display device 81, and when receiving the display hold display position replacement start command, the display control device 114 normally receives the display jackpot presentation start command. The information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 in Ds1 and the information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are replaced in Ds2, and the information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is displayed in Ds1, Information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is displayed on Ds2. Note that this display position switching may be performed at the start of the jackpot presentation or at the end of the jackpot presentation.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot start command has not been received in the processing of S1613 (S1613: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1616). When the round number command is received (S1616: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1617), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1618), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1616 (S1616: No), it is next determined whether or not a time-short end command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1619). If a time-short end command is received (S1619: Yes), a display hold position replacement end command is set (S1620), and this process ends. The display hold position replacement end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When a display hold display position replacement end command is received, information indicating the number of held balls of the special symbol 2 is displayed in Ds1, and is displayed in Ds2 by the display hold display position replacement start command for display in the third symbol display device 81. The replacement display with the information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is terminated, and information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1, which is a normal display, is set to Ds1, and the information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is displayed. Display on Ds2.

  By configuring in this way, the reserved symbol of the special symbol that is preferentially changed is always displayed on Ds1, so that the player can easily recognize the current priority change state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1619, when the special variation end start command is not received (S1619: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S1621), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted. Specific examples of other commands include the opening start command described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1902), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 27). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910.

  In the process of S1909, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, even if the gaming state is changed, the contents of the jackpot type drawn by the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are advantageous and disadvantageous. Was set immutable. However, the modification of the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the advantages and disadvantages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the modification of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 32, in the modification in the first embodiment, the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, respectively. Is set.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol is set so that either jackpot A or jackpot B is selected, and the second special symbol is selected as jackpot D or jackpot C. Is set. On the other hand, in the probabilistic gaming state, the first special symbol is set so that either the jackpot D or the jackpot C is selected, and in the second special symbol, either the jackpot A or the jackpot B is selected. Yes.

  Here, the jackpot A to jackpot C are the same as the contents of the jackpot described in the first embodiment. The jackpot D is different from the jackpot C only in that the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the normal gaming state, and the other configurations are the same.

  Here, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot A or jackpot C, which is a jackpot of 15 rounds, is selected as the first special symbol, and the ratio of setting the jackpot B in which the probability variation gaming state is set is 80%. It is the same as the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, the jackpot type to be selected is jackpot D and jackpot C configured in two rounds. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol is a special symbol that is more advantageous (more prize balls can be obtained) than the second special symbol for the player, and for the player, the first special symbol is It is advantageous to draw more.

  In the probability variation gaming state, the first special symbol is configured so that either the jackpot D or jackpot C, which is a two-round jackpot type, is set. In the second special symbol, the jackpot type of 15 rounds is set. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is selected. Even in the probability variation gaming state, the proportion of the probability variation gaming state given to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is both 80%. Therefore, when the game is in the probable gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to be drawn with the second special symbol than to be drawn with the first special symbol (more prize balls can be obtained). It is a special symbol, and it is advantageous for the player to draw more with the second special symbol.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first special symbol is preferentially changed in the non-time-saving normal game state. In addition, when playing normally, the first incoming ball so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is always stored so that there is no state where the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops and does not change. The winning rate for the mouth 64a and the variation time of the first special symbol are adjusted and set. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 64b does not start to fluctuate during the normal game state, and is carried over until it enters the short-time game state. As a result, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is configured not to start changing in the normal gaming state during non-time savings, but is likely to start changing during the probability change advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player tries to continue to play the game so that the change of the second special symbol does not start during the normal gaming state. Therefore, the game store side can improve game efficiency and increase profits.

  In addition, when shifting to a shorter time, the second special symbol is preferentially started to change. Here, when the jackpot is A, the game shifts to the short-time game in the normal probability state. In this case, it is preferentially changed with the second special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player. However, during the short-time game, it is a period during which it is easy to enter the second entrance 64b and the game can be played with almost no consumption of the possession ball. Playing games with the expectation that any dissatisfaction will be alleviated and that anyway it should be. Thereby, even if the jackpot is awarded without consuming the holding ball, it is possible to reduce the damage on the game shop side and suppress the problem that the profit of the game shop is excessively reduced.

  In addition, in the short time in the probability variation game, since it is preferentially changed with the second special symbol advantageous to the player, it is possible to further increase the profit to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game in anticipation of shifting to a probabilistic game, and can suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of shifting to the probability variation game is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantage and disadvantage may be set differently. . Furthermore, you may set so that a ratio may differ further with game states.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the special symbol that is preferentially started to change is configured to be changed according to the gaming state. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed. The state in which the variation is executed simultaneously with the symbol and the state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed are different from the configuration of the first embodiment in that the state is changed depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIGS. 33-34, the structure of the game board 13 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. The second embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b are added to the sorting unit 640, and the right second entrance 64b2 is added, so that the variable winning device 65 is provided. It differs from the structure of 1st Embodiment by the point provided below the right side 2nd entrance 64b2. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The distribution unit 640 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 34A and 34B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 640. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front surface side, and the cover body is made of a member that can be seen through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  In the upper part of the sorting unit 640, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type ball entrance sensor 640a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage opening is disposed. . The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entry opening 64a and the second entry opening 64b that are disposed below.

  The sorting member 900 receives the entered game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 640a, the sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball as viewed from the front (see FIG. 34A), and the game ball is moved to the first entrance port. Guide to 64a. Here, each of the sorting members 900 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees in the left and right directions, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 640, the magnet 901b of the sorting member 900 is disposed at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 is located at a position where the sorting member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b is located directly above (on the center line of a space where a game ball at the passage opening can be inserted by about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), there is no stopping at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly upwards. It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the sorting member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, so that the sorting member 900 is either left or right. It rotates and either of the accommodating part 900a or the accommodating part 900b turns to the side (game machine upper side) which receives the game ball which enters the distribution unit 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900b and causing a ball clogging.

  Further, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, after the housing portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, the storage portion 900b is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is received by the storage portion 900b. The sorting member 900 rotates about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second entrance 64b. As described above, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting unit 640 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls equally to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b, and to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as the first entrance 64a, which will be described later). The first lottery game) and the lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second entrance 64b can be efficiently executed.

  The right second entrance 64b2 is an entrance where the lottery of the second special symbol will be started when a game ball enters in the same manner as the second entrance 64b. In the second special symbol, the number of the holding balls is four, including the second entrance 64b and the right second entrance 64b2.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed through the left side can enter the passage port of the sorting unit 640, and the right second entrance port 64b2 has a right side. Only game balls that have passed through are configured to be able to enter.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 35, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b and the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 35A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, in the normal gaming state, either the big win D or the big win E is selected with the same lottery ratio in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, there is no advantage or disadvantage in the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the first special symbol is set so that either the big hit F or big hit G is selected, and in the second special symbol, either the big hit H or big hit I is selected. Has been.

  Here, for the jackpot D and jackpot E, jackpots similar to the jackpot A and jackpot B in the first embodiment are executed. The jackpot F and jackpot G are two rounds of jackpot. When the jackpot is F, a promiscuous gaming state is given after the jackpot game, and when the jackpot is G, the game is shifted to the normal gaming state. Both jackpots F and G are not given short-time games. On the other hand, jackpots H and I are jackpots similar to jackpot A and jackpot B. Thus, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol is more advantageous than the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state and the short time gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn at the same time in the non-time-saving normal game state, and the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b are alternately efficient. Since game balls are often inserted, it is possible to allow a player to play a game efficiently and fairly without giving an advantage or disadvantage depending on the type of special symbol.

  On the other hand, during the probability variation gaming state and the short-time game, the player mainly executes the right-handed game aiming at the right second entrance 64b, so the rate of entering the second entrance 64b is high. . In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely shorter than that of the second special symbol during the probabilistic game and in the short time, so that the variation of the second special symbol can be increased in a short time. . Therefore, it is possible to make a lottery game with the second special symbol that is more advantageous to the player, and to give more profit to the player.

  In addition, during the probability change and in the short time, the lottery game can be performed under advantageous conditions by switching the second special symbol so that the second special symbol is changed with priority.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of jackpot type to which the probability variation game is given is the same between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the ratio is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different. You may comprise.

  Specifically, during the probability change, in the short time, in the first special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot type to which the probability variation gaming state and the normal gaming state are given at a rate of 50% is selected, and in the second special symbol, It is set so that the probability variation game is selected at a rate of 100%. With this setting, the rate of selection of the second special symbol is set to 70% at 0.1 seconds by lottery, and the rate of selection at 3 seconds is selected at 25% and 10 seconds. Keep the percentage at 5%. By configuring in this way, the longer the 0.1 second variation time is selected, the faster the reserved special digest time of the second special symbol becomes, the easier the first special symbol variation starts, and the probability variation gaming state ends. There is a high risk of doing so. On the other hand, by selecting a variation time of 10 seconds, it becomes easier to save the hold of the second special symbol, and it is possible to set a high possibility that the probability variation game will be continued.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to generate a jackpot efficiently in a short period of time by changing simultaneously, and during the probability change, either of the special symbols will change whether or not the probability change game can be continued. Can provide a player with innovative gameplay.

  If the percentage of probability change is changed depending on the game state, winning a prize during the jackpot will set the big prize opening to which the probability change will be given and the normal big prize opening. This may be realized by configuring which large winning a prize opening is opened.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 36, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 (S107) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S107). The special symbol variation process 2 (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2, it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S2001). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S2001: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether or not the time is short (S2002). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0, and when the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0, it is determined that the hour / hour counter is being shorter.
If it is determined by the process of S2002 that the time is short (S2002: Yes), the time-short fluctuation process (S2003) is executed. This short-to-middle fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not short (S2002: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 is changing (S2004). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 is fluctuating (S2004: Yes), the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 is executed (S2005), and if it is determined that the special symbol 1 is not fluctuating (S2004: No), the special symbol 1 is changed. The symbol 1 fluctuation stop process is executed (S2006). The special symbol 1 variation start process (S2005) and the special symbol 1 stop process (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing (S2007). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is changing (S2007: Yes), the special symbol 2 change start process is executed (S2008). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is not changing (S2007: No), the special symbol 2 is changed. (2) A fluctuation stop process is executed (S2009). The special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S2008) and the special symbol 2 stop process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44.

  When the process of S2001, S2003, S2008, or S2009 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S2003) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S2003). This special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S2003) is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and the variation of the special symbol 1 is based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (N1). It is a process for performing control which starts.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is acquired (S2101), and the value of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is greater than zero. It is determined whether or not (S2102). When the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is 0 (S2102: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is larger than 0 (S2102: Yes), processing for starting the variation of the special symbol 1 is executed (S2103 to S2106).

  Specifically, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is decremented by 1 (S2103), and the data in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a is shifted (S2104). In the process of S2104, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. Next, a special symbol 1 big hit determination process is executed (S2105), a special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is executed (S2106), and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S2105) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S2105). The special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S2105) is executed in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol 1 is lottery based on the data of the special symbol 1 holding ball execution area 203a. This is a process for setting according to the result.

  In the special symbol 1 big hit determination process, first, data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball execution area 203a is acquired (S2201). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S2202). If it is determined that the probability is changing (S2202: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. However, if it is determined that there is no probability change (S2202: No), a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S2204). Here, whether or not the probability change is in progress is determined based on whether or not the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0. If the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0, it is determined that the probability change is in progress. If it is 0, it is determined that there is no probability change.

  After the process of S2203 or S2204, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203k is on (S2205). The jackpot flag 203k is turned on when either of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined to be a jackpot. Here, if the special symbol 2 for which a change is being performed is a big hit, the jackpot flag 203k is turned on, so the special symbol 2 is a big hit before the special symbol 1 is set as a big hit. It can be determined whether or not there is.

  When it is determined in the process of S2205 that the big hit flag 203k is on (S2205: Yes), the off symbol of the special symbol 1 is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S2210). Here, when the jackpot flag 203k is ON, the symbol out of the special symbol 1 is set, so that it is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring simultaneously with the special symbol 2 in which the fluctuation is being performed at the same time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2205 that the jackpot flag 203k is not on (S2205: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S2206), and when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot ( (S2206: Yes), the jackpot is set for the special symbol 1 (S2207 to S2209), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not a big jackpot (S2206: No), the off symbol of the special symbol 1 is set on the first symbol display device 37. (S2210).

  In the jackpot setting for the special symbol 1 (S2207 to S2209), the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON for the special symbol 1 (S2207), the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is set to the jackpot (S2208) and acquired. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 1 displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S2209). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2201 is compared with the random value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the special symbol big hit (big hit D, big hit E, jackpot F, jackpot G), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49” at normal time when neither the probability change nor the time is short, it is determined that the jackpot D (15R probability change big hit) is “50 to 99”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the jackpot E is determined to be jackpot E (15R normal jackpot). It is determined that it is F (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that it is jackpot G (2R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 35A). When the process of S2209 or S2210 is completed, this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S2106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S2106). The special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S2106) is executed in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (see FIG. 37), and is a process for setting a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special symbol 1. .

  In the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is a big hit (S2301). When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is a jackpot (S2301: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S2302), and the jackpot type table is selected based on the jackpot type. (S2303). on the other hand,. When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is not a big hit (S2301: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S2304).

  When the processing of S2303 or S2304 is finished, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S2305), and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S2306). Based on the variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203o (S2307), and this processing is terminated. The special figure 1 variation pattern command generated in the process of S2206 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern command, it transmits the display fluctuation pattern command to the display control apparatus 114 (see S1904 in FIG. 31). The display control device 114 displays a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command for display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process (S2006) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation stopping process (S2006). This special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process (S2006) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

  In the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is on (S2401). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is on (S2401: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is turned off (S2413), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is turned off. 1 Fluctuation stop command is set (S2414), and this process ends. The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is set to ON when the special figure 2 is a big hit at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. Thereby, when the big hit game of special figure 2 is started, the fluctuation | variation of special figure 1 which is changing simultaneously can be stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is not on (S2401: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203o is subtracted and updated (S2402), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is over. (S2403). Whether or not the variable time is over is determined by whether or not the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203o is 0. If the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203o is 0, the variable time is over. judge.

  If it is determined in S2403 that it is not the end of the variation time (S2403: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable time is over (S2403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is turned on for the special figure 1 (S2404). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is turned on for the special figure 1 (S2404: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is set to on (S2405), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned on. Is set (S2406), and a jackpot start is set (S2407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not on for the special figure 1 (S2404: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero (S2408), and the hour / minute counter 203h is zero. If it is larger (S2408: Yes), the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S2409), and if the hour / hour counter 203h is zero (S2408: No), the process of S2409 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2410. .

  When the processing of S2407, S2408, or S2409 is completed, the special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S2410), the fluctuation of special symbol 1 of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2411), and the time-shortage counter 203h is reset. (S2412), this process ends.

  Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S2006) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S2006). This special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S2006) is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and the variation of the special symbol 2 based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2). It is a process for performing control which starts.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process 2, first, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is acquired (S2501), and the acquired value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S2502). If the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S2502: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is larger than 0 (S2502: Yes), processing for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed (S2503 to S2506).

  Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is decremented by 1 (S2503), and the data in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b is shifted (S2504). In the process of S2104, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. Next, a special symbol 2 big hit determination process is executed (S2505), a special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process is executed (S2506), and this process ends.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S2505) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S2505). The special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S2505) is executed in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 41), and the special symbol 2 is lottery based on the data of the special symbol 2 holding ball execution area 203b. This is a process for setting according to the result.

  In the special symbol 2 big hit determination process, first, data of the special symbol 2 reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S2601). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S2602). If it is determined that the probability is changing (S2602: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. If it is determined that there is no probability change (S2602: No), a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S2604). Here, whether or not the probability change is in progress is determined based on whether or not the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0. If the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0, it is determined that the probability change is in progress. If it is 0, it is determined that there is no probability change.

  After the processing of S2603 or S2604, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is on (S2605). The jackpot flag 203k is turned on when either of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined to be a jackpot. Here, if the special symbol 1 that is changing at the same time is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203k is turned on. Therefore, before setting the jackpot for the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 is a jackpot. It can be determined whether or not there is.

  When it is determined in the processing of S2605 that the big hit flag 203k is on (S2605: Yes), the off symbol of the special symbol 2 is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S2610). Here, when the jackpot flag 203k is on, the symbol out of the special symbol 2 is set, so that it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being made at the same time as the special symbol 1 in which the change is being performed at the same time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not on in the processing of S2605 (S2605: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S2606), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot ( (S2606: Yes), the jackpot is set for the special symbol 2 (S2607 to S2609), and when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit (S2606: No), the off symbol of the special symbol 2 is set on the first symbol display device 37. (S2610).

  In the jackpot setting for the special symbol 2 (S2607 to S2609), the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON for the special symbol 2 (S2607), the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is set to the jackpot (S2608) and acquired. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 2 displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S2609). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2601 is compared with the random value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the special symbol big hit (big hit D, big hit E, jackpot H, jackpot I) and the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49” at normal time when neither the probability change nor the time is short, it is determined that the jackpot D (15R probability change big hit) is “50 to 99”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the jackpot E is determined to be jackpot E (15R normal jackpot). H (15R probability variation jackpot) is determined, and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that jackpot I (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 35A). When the process of S2609 or S2610 is completed, this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S2506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection processing (S2506). This special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S2506) is executed in the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 41), and is a process for setting a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special symbol 2.

  In the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a big hit (S2701). When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S2701: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S2702), and the jackpot type table is selected based on the jackpot type. (S2703). on the other hand,. When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is not a big hit (S2701: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S2304).

  When the processing of S2703 or S2704 is finished, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S2705), and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S2706). Based on the variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203p (S2707), and this processing is terminated. The special figure 2 variation pattern command generated in the process of S2706 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command, it transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 (see S1904 in FIG. 31). The display control device 114 displays a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command for display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process (S2007) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process (S2007). This special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process (S2007) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

  In the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is on (S2801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is on (S2801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned off (S2813), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned off. A two-variation stop command is set (S2814), and this process ends. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is set to ON when the special figure 1 is a big hit at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Thereby, when the jackpot game of special figure 1 is started, the fluctuation | variation of special figure 2 which is fluctuating simultaneously can be stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is not on (S2801: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203p is subtracted and updated (S2802), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is over. (S2803). Whether or not the end of the variable time is determined by whether or not the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203p is 0. If the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203p is 0, the variable time is ended. judge.

  If it is determined in the process of S2803 that the variable time has not ended (S2803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time is over (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203k is turned on for the special figure 2 (S2804). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is on for the special figure 2 (S2804: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is set to on (S2805), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating on is displayed. Is set (S2806), and the start of jackpot is set (S2807).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not on for the special figure 2 (S2804: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero (S2808), and the hour / minute counter 203h is zero. If it is larger (S2808: Yes), the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S2809), and if the hour / hour counter 203h is 0 (S2808: No), the process of S2809 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2810. .

  When the processing of S2807, S2808, or S2809 is completed, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S2810), the special symbol 1 of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing (S2811), and the time-shortage counter 203h is reset. (S2812), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the short-to-middle fluctuation processing (S2003) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the time change processing (S2003). The short / middle fluctuation process (S2003) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 during the time reduction.

  In each of the processes of S202 to S203, S206 to S209, and S211 to S225 in the short / middle fluctuation process, the same process as the above-described special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. And in the main process in 2nd Embodiment, it replaces with the process of S204-S205 and S210 in 1st Embodiment, and the process of S226-S227 is performed.

  Specifically, after acquiring the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S203) by the process of S203, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls It is determined whether the value (N2) of the counter 203e is greater than 0 (S226). When it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S226: Yes), the processing of S211 to S214 for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is executed (S211 to S214). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S226: No), whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0. Is determined (S227). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S227: No), this processing is terminated as it is, and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is When it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S227: Yes), the processing of S206 to S209 for starting the variation of the special symbol 1 is executed (S206 to S209), and this processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the normal gaming state is assumed to be simultaneous variation, and the probability variation gaming state is regarded as priority variation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation and time reduction may be simultaneously varied, and the normal gaming state may be regarded as priority variation.

  Further, the first embodiment and the second embodiment may be combined to change the first special symbol priority, the second special symbol priority, and the simultaneous variation by lottery. For example, after two rounds of big hits and small wins, the second special symbol priority may be configured for simultaneous fluctuation, probability change, and time reduction, and the first special symbol priority may be configured for normal times. What is given priority may be designed as appropriate.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristics A group> (Special figure priority change (per value remains unchanged))
First information is obtained based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and entering the first entrance, Information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and establishment of a lottery condition based on the first information or the second information acquired by the information acquisition means Lottery means for executing lottery when triggered, information storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery A display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by means, and a bonus game grant for giving a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having means, the lottery means When the lottery is determined with the specific lottery result, the type of the bonus game is determined, and when the lottery is based on the entrance to the first entrance, the entrance to the second entrance Based on the bonus game determination means for determining the bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than in the case of the lottery based on, and the establishment of the predetermined condition, it is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state When the normal game state is set by the state setting means for setting one of the special game state and the state setting means, the game ball is placed at the second entrance than the first entrance. An entry that is set in a state in which it is difficult to enter a ball and is set in a state in which a game ball is easier to enter the second entrance than in the first entrance when the special game state is set. The normal gaming state is set by the auxiliary means and the state setting means. In this case, the first information stored in the information storage means is preferentially set to be drawn by the lottery means, and the second information is set when the special gaming state is set. A gaming machine A1 having priority setting means for setting the lottery means so as to be preferentially drawn.

  The gaming machine A1 has the following effects. That is, when a lottery means and a specific lottery result are drawn, the bonus game type is determined by the bonus game determining means, and when the lottery is based on the entrance to the first entrance, the second entry The type of privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than in the case of the lottery based on the entrance into the mouth is determined by the privilege game determination means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, either the normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means. When the normal game state is set by the state setting means, the second entrance is set by the entrance assistant means so that the game ball is less likely to enter than the first entrance, and the special game state is set. When it is set, the second entrance is set to a state where the game entrance is easier to enter than the first entrance by the entrance assisting means. When the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means, the first setting information is set by the priority setting means so that the first information stored in the information storage means is preferentially drawn by the lottery means, and the special gaming state is set. If it is set, the priority setting means sets the second information so that the second information is preferentially drawn by the lottery means. As a result, information that is preferentially varied depending on the gaming state can be varied. Therefore, a fresh game can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A1, the entry assisting means includes a first state in which the game ball is guided to the second entrance and a second state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance. A game machine A2 comprising: a movable piece that can be moved to the first position; and variable means for changing the movable piece between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the entrance assisting means, the game ball is guided to the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the first state. On the other hand, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the second state. The movable piece is changed between the first state and the second state by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to easily enter the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the special gaming state has a higher probability that the lottery means and the specific lottery result and the probability of lottery is set than the normal gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the special gaming state, the probability of being drawn by the lottery means and the specific lottery result is set higher than in the normal gaming state. There is an effect that the interest in games can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games, and the number of small privilege games is less than the first privilege game and the first privilege game as the type of the privilege game. The second bonus game is set at least, and when the special gaming state is set, the second information is configured so that the second bonus game is easily determined. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games. As a type of privilege game, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game with fewer small privilege games than the first privilege game are set. When the special game state is set, the second bonus game is easily determined for the second information. Thereby, a player can be expected to be drawn by the first information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics B group> (Special figure priority change (value per win changes with priority change))
First information is obtained based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and entering the first entrance, Information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and establishment of a lottery condition based on the first information or the second information acquired by the information acquisition means Lottery means for executing lottery when triggered, information storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery Display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the means, and a bonus game grant for giving a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means A certain condition is established in a gaming machine having means Based on the state setting means for setting either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and when the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means When the game ball is set to be harder to enter the second entrance than the first entrance and is set to the special game state, the game ball is placed in the second entrance. As a type of the bonus game given by the entrance assisting means set to be easier to enter than the first entrance and the bonus game granting means, a first bonus game and its first bonus game The type determination means for determining one of the second privilege games that are more advantageous to the player, and the lottery for the one information than the lottery for the second information in the normal gaming state Than the first privilege game. When the 2 privilege game is easily determined by the type determining means and is in the special game state, the lottery for the second information is more than the lottery for the second information than the first privilege game. In the case where a normal variable game state is set by the determination variable means for making the second privilege game easy to be determined by the type determination means and the state setting means, the first information stored in the information storage means is given priority. Priority setting means for setting the lottery means to be selected by lottery means, and when the special gaming state is set, priority setting means for giving priority to the second information to be selected by the lottery means; A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising:

  The gaming machine B1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, either the normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means, and the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means. When the second entrance is set to a state where it is harder for the game ball to enter than the first entrance by the entrance assisting means, and the special entrance state is set, the second entrance The entrance is set by the entrance assisting means so that the game ball is easier to enter than the first entrance. As the type of privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, one of the first privilege game and the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is decided by the type determining means. . In the normal gaming state, the determination or piece means makes it easier for the type determination means to determine the second privilege game than the first privilege game for the lottery for the first information rather than the lottery for the second information. . On the other hand, when the game state is in the special game state, the type determination means determines the second privilege game rather than the first privilege game for the lottery for the second information rather than the lottery for the first information by the decision or one means. Made easier. When the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means, the priority setting means sets the first information stored in the information storage means so as to be drawn by the lottery means. Further, when the special game state is set by the state setting means, the priority setting means is set so that the second information is preferentially drawn by the lottery means. As a result, information that is preferentially varied depending on the gaming state can be varied. Therefore, a fresh game can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine B1, the entrance assisting means includes a first state in which the game ball is guided to the second entrance and a second state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance. A game machine B2 comprising: a movable piece that can be moved to the first position; and variable means for changing the movable piece between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the entrance assisting means, the game ball is guided to the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the first state. On the other hand, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the second state. The movable piece is changed between the first state and the second state by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to easily enter the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the special gaming state is set such that the probability of being drawn by the lottery means and the specific lottery result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, in the special gaming state, the probability of being drawn by the lottery means and the specific lottery result is set higher than in the normal gaming state. There is an effect that the interest in games can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the privilege game is configured by a plurality of small privilege games, and the number of the small privilege games is less than the first privilege game and the first privilege game as the type of the privilege game. When the second bonus game is set at least and the normal gaming state is set, the first bonus is easily determined with respect to the first information, and the special gaming state is If set, the gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the first bonus game is easily determined for the second information.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games. As a type of privilege game, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game with fewer small privilege games than the first privilege game are set. When the special game state is set, the second bonus game is easily determined for the second information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic C group> (Switch between simultaneous fluctuation state and priority fluctuation)
First information is obtained based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and entering the first entrance, Information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and establishment of a lottery condition based on the first information or the second information acquired by the information acquisition means Lottery means for executing lottery when triggered, information storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery Display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the means, and a bonus game grant for giving a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having means, the lottery means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result based on the first information and the identification information indicating the lottery result based on the second information on the display means; Based on the establishment of the condition, state setting means for setting either the first gaming state or a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is set by the state setting means Based on that, a simultaneous lottery state is established in which the lottery conditions for the first information and the second information are simultaneously established, and the first information and the second information are based on the fact that the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine C1 comprising: lottery state setting means for setting a priority lottery state in which one of the lottery conditions is preferentially established among the second information.

  The gaming machine C1 has the following effects. That is, identification information indicating the lottery result based on the first information by the lottery means and identification information indicating the lottery result based on the second information are dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, either the first gaming state or a second gaming state different from the first gaming state is set by the state setting means. Based on the setting of the first gaming state by the state setting means, a simultaneous lottery state in which the lottery conditions for the first information and the second information are simultaneously satisfied is set by the lottery state setting means, and the second state is set. Based on this, the lottery state setting means sets a priority lottery state in which one of the first information and the second information is preferentially established. Thereby, the player can provide a game with a fresh taste by changing the period during which the game is efficiently executed and the period during which one of the fluctuations is preferentially changed by simultaneously changing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the state setting means sets the second gaming state, the gaming machine C1 is set to enter a state in which a gaming ball is easier to enter the second entrance than the first entrance. A gaming machine C2 having ball assisting means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1, when the second game state is set by the state setting means, the second entrance is more than the first entrance by the entrance assisting means. Since the game ball is set in a state where it is easy to enter, there is an effect that the player can expect a state where it is easy to win the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine C2, the lottery state setting means sets the priority lottery state so that the lottery condition of the second information is preferentially established when the second game state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being set.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C2, when the second gaming state is set by the state setting means, the lottery state setting is performed so that the lottery condition of the second information is preferentially established. Since the priority lottery state is set by the means, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the second gaming state is configured to give a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the state setting means includes the lottery means A gaming machine C4, which determines one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the fact that the specific lottery result is drawn.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than in the first gaming state is given. Based on the fact that the lottery means has drawn a lottery result, either the first game state or the second game state is determined by the state setting means. Thereby, it can be expected that the player is set to the second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the game machine C4 includes dynamic display time determining means for determining a time for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means from a plurality of times, and the dynamic display determining means is set in the second gaming state. When this is done, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is easier to determine a longer dynamic display time by using the lottery result for the second information as a dynamic display of the identification information than in the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the time for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means is determined from a plurality of times by the dynamic display determination means. Also, when the second gaming state is set, the dynamic display time is longer than the time when the identification information indicating the lottery result for the second information is dynamically displayed compared to when the first gaming state is set. It is easy to be determined by the automatic display time determination means. Thereby, a game more advantageous to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st entrance 64b 2nd entrance 81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
203 RAM (information storage means)
S105 Information acquisition means S204 Priority setting means S402 Part of lottery means S403 Part of privilege game determination means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a plurality of entrances, and whether or not the game is won based on the winning of a game ball at the entrance and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The symbol or the like shown is stopped and displayed. When winning is performed during the execution of the variable display, up to the upper limit number of winning information and the like used for determination of success / failure is stored in the reserved area. When the variable display is stopped, the next variable display is started based on the highest priority among the winning information in the holding area. The height of the priority is determined by the type of winning entrance and the winning order, and in the same type of entrance, the priority becomes higher in the order of winning. The winning information in the reserved area is moved to the execution area or the like when the change based on the winning information or the like is started.

  As described above, in a gaming machine having a plurality of entrances, there is a gaming machine that makes it easy for a player to understand the order in which variation starts, by determining the order in which variation display starts. It was proposed.

JP 2013-188368 A

  However, the variable display is monotonous that it is started in an order based on a predetermined priority, and there is a problem that it is not possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance ball. acquires first information based on it has entered the special unit, an information acquisition unit for acquiring second information based on that ball entrance to the second ball entrance means, acquired by the information acquisition means and the A determination unit that executes determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the first information or the second information; and the first information acquired by the information acquisition unit until the determination condition is satisfied; and storable information storage means and the second information, respectively, and a display unit on which identification information based on the determination result by said determining means is displayed, when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit in, perform a benefit game that is advantageous to the player And a privilege game execution means that, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the normal gaming state and a state setting means for setting either a special game state is advantageous to the player than the normal game state, the when the state setting means is the normal game state is set, the game balls in the second ball entrance means is set to ball entrance difficult conditions than the first ball entrance means, is set to the special game state If it has, a ball entrance auxiliary means game balls in the second ball entrance means is set to ball entrance easily state than the first ball entrance means, the award game executed by the award game execution means As the type, the type determining means for determining one of the first privilege game and the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the normal game state, than said determination for said second information 1 Against discrimination for distribution, to facilitate the said second privilege game than the first award game is determined by the type determination means, when the a special gaming state than said determination for said first information a When the normal game state is set by the state setting means and the determination variable means for making the second privilege game easier to be determined by the type determining means than the first privilege game, for the discrimination for the two information. Sets the first information stored in the information storage means to be discriminated by the discriminating means, and gives priority to the second information when the special gaming state is set. And priority setting means for setting so as to be discriminated by the discriminating means.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, prior to filling balls auxiliary means, game ball in a first state and said second ball entrance means for directing game ball to the second ball entrance means A movable piece movable in a second state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and variable means for changing the movable piece between the first state and the second state.
A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the predetermined condition is established based on execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first entrance means capable of entering a game ball , the second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance means are entered. Information acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the information and acquiring the second information based on the fact that the second information has been entered, and the first information acquired by the information acquisition means or the information Based on the second information, the determination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means until the determination condition is satisfied Each of the information storage means that can be stored, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means, A privileged game executor who executes an advantageous privileged game And a state setting means for setting either a normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the state setting means When the normal gaming state is set, when the game ball is set in the second ball entry means in a state where it is harder to enter than the first ball entry means, and when the special game state is set, As a type of bonus game executed by the bonus assisting means that is set in a state in which a game ball enters the second pitching means easier to enter than the first pitching means, A type determining means for determining one of a privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game; For the discrimination of the one information rather than the discrimination Then, the second privilege game is more easily determined by the type determining means than the first privilege game, and when it is in the special game state, the determination on the second information rather than the determination on the first information. On the other hand, when the normal game state is set by the determination variable means for making the second privilege game easier to be determined by the type determining means than the first privilege game, and the state setting means, the information The first information stored in the storage means is set so as to be determined by the determination means, and when the special gaming state is set, the second information is prioritized and the determination means. And priority setting means for setting so as to be discriminated by.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the entry assisting means is movable between a first state in which the game ball is guided to the second entry means and a second state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry means. A movable piece and variable means for changing the movable piece between the first state and the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to easily enter the second entrance.
According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the predetermined condition is established based on the execution of the special game by the special game execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to execute the privilege game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a judgment value per second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of these. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol 1. FIG. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol 2. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of big hit. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of a fluctuation | variation classification. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display of the holding symbol at the time of normal, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display of the holding symbol at the time of shortening, (c) is a special at the time of shortening It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display of the holding | maintenance symbol when the number of reservation balls of the symbol 2 decreases. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the variable execution determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the distribution unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 in 2nd Embodiment and the jackpot type in a special symbol, (b) is the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of RAM inside. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 big hit judgment processing which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the short time medium fluctuation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize) to be described later are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64 a, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64a, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and the ball enters the second entrance 64b. In such a case, the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a hit, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is opened, and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As will be described in detail later, the special symbol jackpot is determined by a dedicated lottery for each of the first special symbol jackpot and the second special symbol jackpot. If the first special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of jackpot A and jackpot B. When the second special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the three types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, and “jackpot C” (FIGS. 9A to 9B). reference). The specific winning opening 65a is opened as many times as the number of jackpot types. Further, after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 64b, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are three types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, and “Big Jack C”. When “Big jackpot A”, “Big jackpot B”, or “Big jackpot C” is reached, a special gaming state with the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot type is entered.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, specifically, the “big hit A” is a big hit (15R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 15 times, and the big hit game Later in the short-time gaming state (period in which the special symbol has a low probability, the normal symbol probability is set to a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory becomes long, and the number of times of opening is set large), the special symbol starts to change 100 times It is set 100 times as a period until it is done. “Big Bonus B” is a jackpot (15R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is opened 15 times, and after the jackpot game, a probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability of a special symbol is set to a high probability ( High probability game state) is given 100 times (the number of times of special symbol fluctuation). Further, the “big hit C” is a big hit (2R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened twice, and 100 chance games are given after the big hit game. In addition, “probable jackpot A” and “big jackpot B” are also given a short-time game state of a normal symbol during probability variation games. Also, “big hit A” and “big hit B” are until the opening time of one round of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. The “big hit C” is set until the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is 1 second or ten game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the present embodiment, a small hit different from the big win is set with a predetermined probability in the case of a loss. When winning a small win, the specific winning opening 65a is opened twice. The opening time of the specific winning opening 65a for one round of the specific winning opening 65a is set until 1 game ball or 10 gaming balls enter in the same manner as the “big hit C”. As described above, it is difficult for the player to identify “big hit C” and “small win” from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, since “big hit C” and “small hit” are notified in the state (main chance) that the main symbol of “341” is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display the special symbol (third It is difficult to identify from the design. Further, the special symbol (first symbol) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is an LED or 7-segment display that is difficult for the player to identify, and is configured so that the jackpot type is difficult to distinguish. Yes.

  In addition, since a short-time game is not set after “big hit C” and “small hit”, it is difficult to identify whether it was “big hit C” or “small hit” in subsequent games. Thereby, even if the player is “small hit”, the game can be performed with the expectation that the “big hit C” is executed and the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state. . Thereby, the malfunction which a player gets tired of a game in the period until "big hit AC" is performed can be suppressed.

  Here, the “special symbol probability change gaming state (high probability state)” means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability has increased, so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol probability change), in other words, special symbol It is a game state that is easily shifted to the game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is referred to as a “normal game state of a special symbol (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. The jackpot probability indicates a normal state (a normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, and the Riu electric character is a game ball provided along with the second entrance 64b. Is a game state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the short time period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds at the jackpot according to the jackpot type Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery ends three times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed six times after the end, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the" big hit C "ends. The short state may be continued at this time.

  Furthermore, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the second entrance 64b or the electric symbol is released at one normal symbol hit. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become. Instead of the special symbol lottery count, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is newly made by the time the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot ends, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed after the jackpot of the new special symbol is over. The lottery is continued until 100 lotteries are completed. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further changed to the new symbol. It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, until at least 102 lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lottery performed after the new jackpot are finished, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “normal symbol short-time state” is further increased to the new jackpot. It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entry (start winning prize) to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is being executed. A variation display is performed, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation ends, or the first entrance port 64a or the second entrance port 64b. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the ball, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81, and even when the ball enters the second entrance 64b, the number of entrances is a maximum of four times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the entrance to the 1st entrance 64a and the 2nd entrance 64b could be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension was limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is jackpot A or jackpot B, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the jackpot type. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds of jackpots in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. In the case of a big hit C, a chance eye composed of “341” breaks is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance chance is one type of “341”, but is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other random eyes, or one of the reach misses may be set as the chance eye. Good.

  Variation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the special symbol set as priority is changed based on the priority set in the gaming state. Is set. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state other than the normal symbol is set to the short-time gaming state (the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state in which the short-time state is not set (100 times after jackpot C)), the first special symbol of Variation is prioritized. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the variation of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set so that only 15 rounds of jackpot are selected, and the second special symbol is selected. Then, it is set so that the jackpot of two rounds is selected with a probability of 40%. As a ratio of jackpots to shift to the high probability gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 80% respectively, and are configured at the same rate.

  Therefore, the first special symbol is set so that the jackpot advantageous to the player is more easily selected than the second special symbol. Therefore, when a big hit is made in a gaming state other than the short-time gaming state, which is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, the first special symbol variation is preferentially executed so that a lottery advantageous to the player is executed. It is comprised so that. In addition, when the game state is set to the short-time game state that is advantageous to the player, the variation of the second special symbol that is a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is preferentially executed. Yes.

  With this configuration, in a gaming state unfavorable to the player, a lottery game advantageous to the player (a lot of profit on the jackpot) can be easily obtained, and the player's damage becomes excessive. It is comprised so that it can suppress. Also, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is easy to get a big win in a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player (less profit on the jackpot), and the damage on the game store side becomes excessive or gambling Is configured so as to be able to suppress a problem that becomes extremely high.

  In the present embodiment, if the game ball is continuously being fired, the game ball for 1000 yen (250 shots) is about 17 to 20 times, the first entrance 64a or the second entrance. A game nail or the like is arranged so that it can enter the ball opening 64b (when a prize ball paid out by winning a prize at the first ball entry opening 64a or the second ball entry opening 64b is also used). In the normal gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol is set so that a relatively long variation time (variation pattern such as reach) is easily selected. The game is configured to be easily played in the stored state, and even when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is stored, the variable display for the held ball is not started. Thereby, although the game state is unfavorable to the player, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the disadvantage that is disadvantageous to the player is suppressed.

  In the short-time gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time (30 seconds) (3 seconds). ) And the number of times of opening (2 times) are set to be larger than the opening time (0.5 seconds) and the number of times of opening (1 time) in normal times. In order to launch a game ball so that the game ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a left route through which the game ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a variable The right side of the display unit 80 is composed of two types, the right route through which the game ball passes, and a gate 67 is provided on both routes for the game ball as a trigger for starting a normal symbol. As a result, during the short-time gaming state, no matter how the game balls are fired, the normal symbol lottery is started, and the game balls are placed in the second entrance 64b rather than the first entrance 64a. Easy to enter the ball. Therefore, even during the short-time game, it is possible to suppress fraud that makes it possible to make a more advantageous jackpot by making a lottery with only the first special symbol.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, the game ball is easily inserted into the second entrance 64b, so that a prize ball equivalent to the launched game ball is easily paid out. The second entrance 64b It is designed to be a disadvantage to the player if it is not allowed to enter. Therefore, the player can inevitably play a game so as to enter the second entrance 64b, and can make it difficult to notice that the game is preferentially played with an unfavorable special symbol.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the second entrance 64b and the number of prize balls to be paid out increases, so that the game store can play game balls at the gate 67 in order to increase profits. It is conceivable to set the game nail so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 64b even when the game nail is set so that it is difficult for the player to pass through or when the electric accessory is activated. . However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 64b during the short-time game, the first special symbol is likely to start to change. Since the probability that the jackpot is determined to be 40 is high, even if there is a small fluctuation in the first special symbol, the jackpot will be determined by the first special symbol. Thereby, it becomes difficult for the game store side to adjust the game nail so as to make it difficult to enter the second entrance 64b, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that becomes an excessive disadvantage to the player. By configuring in this way, during the short-time game, even when the design is made with an effect that is assumed to be always drawn by the second special symbol, the effect is not performed as designed by the adjustment of the game store. Defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a secondary display area Ds for displaying the number of balls held.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are reserved balls that are the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. This is the area for displaying numbers. Specifically, in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls of special symbols set to be changed with priority is displayed, and in the small area Ds2, the reserved special symbols set to non-priority are displayed. The number of balls is displayed.

  Although the details will be described later, an ending display indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed, and is set after the jackpot game at the end timing of the ending display (specifically, the timing from the end of the ending until the start of the next special symbol change) The display position of the holding ball is varied based on the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is “white circle symbol (see FIG. 4A)” so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other. The reserved sphere of the second special symbol is displayed as “white triangle symbol (see FIG. 4A)”.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls set as priority is two or less, non-priority reserved symbols are displayed blinking (see FIG. 12C), and the non-priority reserved symbols vary. It is configured to notify the player that there is a risk of starting. By configuring in this way, even if the player is playing a game without noticing the state where the player has not fired the game ball due to a broken piece of the upper plate or a clogged ball, the failure can be notified, It is possible to suppress a lottery with special symbols that are disadvantageous to the player.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2 of the corresponding sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the reserved ball of the second entrance 64b is set in the same manner as the first entrance 64a.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are synchronized with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Each value is stored separately. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first random number table 202a (FIG. 8B) includes a first per random number table 202a for low probability and a first per random number table 202 for high probability. The number of random numbers that are included in the jackpot is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is low and the first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is high are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball has won the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 8B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 29” is the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b) for high probability. ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIGS. 9A to 9B). As shown in FIG. 9A, when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2. Becomes “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type of is “Big Jack A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 59” is “jackpot B”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot C”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64a and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 10B to 10D) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 10B to 10D) includes, for example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disengagement (for a short time)”, “discovery normal reach” as variation patterns for removal. ”,“ Outgoing Super Reach ”,“ Outgoing Special Reach ”are stipulated, and the variation patterns for jackpots are“ Normal Normal Reach ”,“ Per Super Reach ”, and“ Perch Special Reach ”. Yes. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 10A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number that is the winning set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 10A) matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is won. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64a is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64a is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64a is opened “2 times per second”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64a is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64a is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is immediately input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Special symbol 2 held ball counter 203e, normal symbol held ball counter 203f, pre-reading probability changing counter 203g, hour / short counter 203h, counter buffer 203i, variation execution flag 203j, and other memory areas (see FIG. Not shown).

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (first special symbol), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64a, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big special lottery drawing of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 has a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the first entrance port 64a ( The only difference is that the first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time the ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value is 8. 1 is added (see S604 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S206 in FIG. 14).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S207 in FIG. 14 and S605 in FIG. 18). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the corresponding small area Ds1 or small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 64b (second special symbol). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the first entrance (first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol). However, since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the processing of S610 in FIG. 18, and is subtracted by 1 each time a special symbol variation display is executed (see S211 in FIG. 14). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S212 in FIG. 14 and S611 in FIG. 18). ).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol normal display (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S904 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S805 in FIG. 20).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S905 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S903 in FIG. 21: No).

  The pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (a high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is set to zero, and the main controller 110 closes the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the final round of the jackpot (that is, the jackpot end timing). Is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot type. Specifically, 0 is set for “big hit type A”, and 100 is set for “big hit type B” and “big hit type C”. Thereafter, while the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S710 in FIG. 19).

  When the MPU 201 executes the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 16) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 17), a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, the value of the pre-reading probability variation counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to zero. In the main controller 110, the timing for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the final round of jackpot A and jackpot B (that is, jackpot) A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set in (end timing). Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” and “big hit type B”, and 0 is set for “big hit type C”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / short counter 203h becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 14).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on the second random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203h is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per-random number table for the low probability (see S810 and S811 in FIG. 20).

  The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. This flag is an area that is backed up even when power is interrupted, and the first special symbol is preferentially set in the initial state where the RAM is cleared.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. Yes.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. In the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, a small hit determination value is set to “30 to 39”. On the other hand, no small hit determination value is set in the first hit random number table 202a for low probability.

  As a result, in the normal gaming state in which the first special symbol is preferentially changed, it is possible to prevent the small win from being established, and it becomes easy to identify that the winning two rounds are the small hit. Can be suppressed. Also, in the short time in the probabilistic gaming state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed, it is easy to win a big hit C. Therefore, by setting to win a small hit, it is a big hit C or small It can be difficult to identify whether or not it is a win, and the player can play for a longer time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8C) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type. . As shown in FIG. 8C, the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 dedicated to the first special symbol (see FIG. 9A) and a special symbol 2 dedicated to the second special symbol. And a selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 9B).

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected, respectively, and the value “1” of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the judgment value for the big hit A. “0-19” is set as “20-99” as the judgment value of jackpot B. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is set so that a big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C can be selected, respectively. The counter C2 value “0-19” is set as a jackpot B determination value “20-59” and a jackpot C determination value “60-99”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10A) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened “1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 8D) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10 (b)) when the judgment result is a jackpot, and a judgment of success / failure. If the result is out of play and the game state is normal, a dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10C) and the result of the determination of whether or not the result is out of order and the game state is probable game state. Each (variable) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) is at least configured. In addition, although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table for a short-time gaming state is set.

  Returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start flag 223d are displayed. And a stop type selection flag 223e are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64a, or variation display in a special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 36). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the corresponding small region Ds1 or small region Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the corresponding small area Ds1 or small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 changes while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Can be made. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held. As to whether to display the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2, when the big hit start command is received from the main controller 110, the type of the big hit is determined. Then, a command indicating the hold display position is output to the display control device 114 (S1618 in FIG. 28). In addition, when a short time end command is received, a command indicating the hold display position command is output (S1620 in FIG. 28). The display control device 114 is controlled to set the hold display position without changing until the hold display position command is output. When the power is cut off, a command indicating the hold display position in accordance with the current gaming state is set as an initial setting command by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control device 113. And the display control device 114 is also instructed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the hold display position when the power is turned on (not shown).

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 31). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 31). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Since the details of the display control device 114 are already known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG. 12 shows the case where the display position of the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed when the priority in the change of the special symbol is changed, and the reserved ball number is equal to or less than the predetermined ball number (this embodiment) It is the figure which showed the aspect by which the display mode of a non-priority reservation symbol is changed and displayed when it becomes 2 or less in a form).

  FIG. 12 (a) is a diagram showing a reserved symbol in a gaming state other than the short time gaming state in which the first special symbol is preferentially changed. The reserved symbol “white circle” of the first special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, and the reserved symbol “white triangle” of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the state shifts to the short-time gaming state and the second special symbol is preferentially started to change. The reserved symbol “white triangle” of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, and the reserved symbol “white circle” of the first special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2. The display is switched by the display control device 114 at the timing when the ending at the end of the jackpot ends. The display control device 114 outputs a command (display hold display position replacement command for display) indicating the hold display position according to the jackpot type based on the fact that the sound lamp control device 113 has received the jackpot start command. Thus, the hold display position can be determined in advance.

  FIG. 12C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is two in the short-time gaming state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol set as priority becomes 2 or less, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol set as non-priority is blinked and displayed. Thereby, it can alert | report that there exists a possibility that the 2nd special symbol set non-priority by the player may be started to fluctuate. Therefore, the player can check whether or not the game ball is normally launched, and if the game ball is not normally launched due to a clogged ball or a broken ball, take measures to recover it. be able to. Note that this non-priority reserved symbol blinking display is similarly executed for the second special symbol when the first special symbol is set to be prioritized.

  In the present embodiment, the non-priority special symbol blinks when the number of priority reserved balls is two or less, both when the first special symbol is prioritized and when the second special symbol is prioritized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition of the number of reserved balls to be displayed in a blinking manner may be set differently depending on the type of special symbol set with priority. Specifically, when the first special symbol is given priority, the number of reserved balls is two or less, and when the second special symbol is given priority, the number of reserved balls is one or less. The mouth 64a takes time to enter the ball in the normal gaming state (compared to the second entrance 64b in the short time), so by giving an early notice, there is enough time to deal with the player Can be given. On the other hand, since the second entrance 64b in the short time is relatively easy for game balls to enter, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the notification is generated frequently by delaying the notification timing.

  In the present embodiment, the notification mode blinks the non-priority reserved symbols, but is not limited to this, and the priority reserved symbols may blink, or both the priority and non-priority reserved symbols blink. Of course, other notification modes such as notification by text or voice may be used.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 to 25. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of times of holding N2) is acquired (S203). Next, a change execution determination process is performed in which it is determined whether the change sphere is executed with the reserved sphere of the special symbol 1 or the hold sphere of the special symbol 2 and the change execution flag 203j is set (S204). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process is the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205). If it is not the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205: No) ), It is determined whether or not the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in FIG. 2 (S210). If the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution (2) in FIG. 2 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206) and is changed by the calculation. The reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S205, if the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in FIG. S210) If the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same process as the process for the special sphere 1 reserved sphere described above is performed for the special sphere 2 reserved sphere. Do.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. 2 Fluctuation start processing is executed (S214). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 16 or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, the stop symbol of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is set. More specifically, when the special symbol 1 is a big hit, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, the special symbol 2 is a big hit In this case, it is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, the special symbol display (the result of the current lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S219), a jackpot start command is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S225.

  The jackpot start command set in the process of S220 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114 (see S1614 in FIG. 28) and also displays a display hold display position replacement start command to the display control device 114. Transmit (see S1615 in FIG. 28). Upon receiving the display hold display position replacement start command, the display control device 114 displays a display based on the number of held balls of the special symbol 1 on Ds2, and displays a display based on the number of held balls of the special symbol 2 on Ds1. Swap so that.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S221), and the hour / minute counter 203h When it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour / middle counter 203h is 0 (S221: No), the process from S222 to S224 is skipped and the process proceeds to S225.

  In the process of S223, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S223), and if it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is 0 (S223: Yes), a time reduction end command is issued. The setting is made (S224), and the process proceeds to S225. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour / middle counter 203h is not 0 (S223: No), the process of S224 is skipped and the process proceeds to S225.

  In the process of S225 executed after the process of S220, S221, S223, or S224, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217 and the third symbol display A stop command is set to synchronize the variable stop of the device 81 (S225).

  Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is used. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variable execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting the variable execution flag to 0 (S301), and it is determined whether the time is running short (S302). If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more and it is determined that the hour / hour counter is shorter (S302: Yes), the change in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is executed with priority.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S303). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S303: Yes), the fluctuation execution flag 203j is set to the fluctuation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S304), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S303: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 ( S305). If the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0, the fluctuation execution flag 203j is set to fluctuation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S306), and this process is terminated. If the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is 0 (S305: No), there is no suspended ball to be subjected to variation execution, and thus this processing is terminated while the variation execution flag 203j remains in the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 and it is determined that the hour / hour counter is not shorter (S302: No), the change in the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is executed with priority.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S307). If the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S307: Yes), the variation execution flag 203j is set to the variation execution (1) in the special diagram 1 (S308), and this process is terminated. . On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S307: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 ( S309). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0, the fluctuation execution flag 203j is set to fluctuation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S310), and this process is terminated. If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S309: No), since there is no reserved ball to be changed and executed, this processing is ended while the change execution flag 203j is in the initial state.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, each of the big hit determination result of the special symbol 1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3. A value is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the jackpot determination result of the special symbol 1 acquired by the process of S401 is a jackpot of the special symbol 1 (S402). If it is determined in the process of S402 that the special symbol 1 is a big hit (S402: Yes), the display mode for the big win is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401. (S403).

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b, and 2 It is determined what type of jackpot is out of jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) of special symbols. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is determined that the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “20 to 99”, the jackpot B (15R probability variation big hit) is determined (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S403, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S404). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S404, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10B). Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 1”, special reach, if it is in the range of “2 to 7”, super reach, and if in the range of “8 to 24”, normal reach. A variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S402, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S402: No), a display mode of out is set (S405). In the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the above. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out”, and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S406). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S404, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time.

  When the processing of S404 or S406 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S404 or S406 is set (S407). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 or S406 is set (S408). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1201 of the main processing (FIG. 24). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S408 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 variation start process, as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 jackpot determination result obtained by the processing of S501 is a special symbol 2 jackpot. (S501) When it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is determined, the jackpot display mode is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501 (S503). The specific content is similar to the setting of the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) (S403), according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) 1 The display mode of the symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set, and the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) is set as the stop type. In the present embodiment, the process of S503 is set using the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, which is different from the special figure 1 selection table used in the special symbol 1 jackpot display mode setting (S404). However, it may be set using the same table.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202d2 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S504), and the process proceeds to S507.

  On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out (S502: No), the display mode of out is set (S505). The specific content is the same as the setting (S405) of the display mode out of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209).

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  When the processing of S504 or S506 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the variation pattern determined in S504 or S506 is set (S507). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S504 or S506 is set (S508). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1201 of the main processing (FIG. 24). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S508 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64a (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball inlet 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64a (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  If there is no winning at the first entrance 64a (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S603: No), the process proceeds to S607. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is acquired (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

  In the process of S607, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 64b (S607). If it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64b (S607: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is processed in the same manner as when the first entrance 64a is won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S608), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S609: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S610), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S611). Then, the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S612), and the process proceeds to S613.

  There is no winning at the second entrance 64b (S607: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S609: No), the process proceeds to S613.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the prefetching process of S613 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S613). This prefetch process (S613) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 18).

  In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S701). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S701: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is pre-reading probability change (S702). ), If the gaming state is in the pre-reading probability change (S702: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (S703), S705 Move on to processing. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 8B) at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a. A determination is made by comparing the value (win value) being made one by one (S703). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 39”, it is determined to be a small hit, and “40 to 399”. If it is within the range, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 8B).

  On the other hand, in the process of S702, if the gaming state is not a prefetch probability change (S702: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a (S704). ), The process proceeds to S705. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 8B) at the low probability of the first per-random number table 202a. A determination is made by comparing the value (win value) being made one by one (S703). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 2”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “3 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 8B). ).

  In the processing of S705, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S705). . Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S706), and the process proceeds to S707.

  After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol by the processing of S703 or S704, the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above If each value of the counter C3 is a winning of the first entrance 64a, the first area among the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S705). If the winning is for the second entrance 64b, it is stored in the first area among the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704 is set (S706). The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the jackpot determination result from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a, which is used for pre-reading effect processing and the like. To do.

  After the winning information command is set in the process of S706, it is determined whether the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704 is a special symbol jackpot (S707). When the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704 is a special symbol jackpot (S707: Yes), a value corresponding to each jackpot type is set in the prefetching probability changing counter 203g (S708), and this processing is performed. finish. The value setting corresponding to each jackpot type is to set 0 for jackpot A and 100 for jackpot B or jackpot C. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination result determined in S703 or S704 is out of the special symbol (including the small bonus) (S707: No), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0 ( If the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0 (S709), the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S710), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S709: No), the process of S710 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64a. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S801). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64a is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S804: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S805).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h in the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S808). The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / hour state. If the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S808: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is normal. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S808: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S808: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S809). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S809: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64a is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64a as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64a, the first winning opening 65a is limited even if the first winning opening 64a is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64a during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the entrance 64a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S809, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S809: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S807. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S810). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S808, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S808: No), the process proceeds to S811. In the process of S811, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S807 is low. Based on the second per random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S811). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S810 or S811 is a normal symbol win (S812). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S812: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S813). In the process of S813, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S814). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S814: Yes), the current present is the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S815). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S815: Yes), the process proceeds to S817. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64a as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where it is out of the normal symbol In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S815, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S815: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64a is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S816), and the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S814, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S814: No), the process proceeds to S817. In the process of S817, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64a is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S817), and the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S812, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S812: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S818). In the process of S818, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S819, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S819), and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S819: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S820), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S819: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S821), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a.

  In the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S822). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S820 or the process of S821 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S822, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S822: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S822 (S822: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823). In the process of S823, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S813, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S818, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S823, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the process of S813 or S818.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S824). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S824: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64a is set (S825), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S825, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or S817 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S824, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S824: No), the process of S825 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the normal entrance 67, and when the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S903).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S903: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S904). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S905), and this process ends. In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104). If it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1112 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S1112 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1112, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1105: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1110, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1201 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1210 and S1211 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the voice lamp control device receives the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) and the start winning process (see FIG. 18) and the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 18). 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the jackpot start command, the time reduction end command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14), the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25), and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. . In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1204). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. This jackpot end setting includes the setting of the start of the special variable period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in rounds other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1204) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64a is executed (S1205). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1206). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 16) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 17), a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 16) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 17) ends, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S820 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 20) or the processing of S821, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S823 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S813 or S818 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes after S1201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1209: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main process execution timing is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1210, S1211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1210). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1202 (S1211).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1208, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the power-off process after S1212 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1212), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1213). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1214), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1215), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1208 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1207, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1210 and S1211 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1204). This jackpot control process (S1204) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 24). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being jackpoted (S1301). Specifically, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) S219 is executed, and if the special symbol jackpot start is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1301, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1302). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1302: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1303), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1304). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1302 (S1302: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1305). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1305: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1305: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1306), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning award (large opening) 65a this time is for the final round (that is, whether or not all the big hit rounds have ended) (S1307).

  When it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1307: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1308), and values corresponding to the jackpot are set in various counters. It sets (S1309). That is, by setting 100 in the hour / short counter 203h, the normal symbol is set in a high probability state (short time state) from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. After setting various counter values, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1307: No), S1308 and S1309 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

  In this way, when the short-time gaming state is set, the second special symbol is set to be changed with priority. As a result, in the non-short-time gaming state disadvantageous to the player, the lottery is preferentially executed with the first special symbol in which the lottery advantageous to the player is executed, and the short-time and middle-time gaming state advantageous to the player Then, it can be configured that a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player (a lottery type with a small number of prize balls obtained in the case of a jackpot is easily selected) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a balance in which the player's profit and the game shop's profit are not excessive.

  In the present embodiment, if the game ball is continuously being fired, the game ball for 1000 yen (250 shots) is about 17 to 20 times, the first entrance 64a or the second entrance. A game nail or the like is arranged so that it can enter the ball opening 64b (when a prize ball paid out by winning a prize at the first ball entry opening 64a or the second ball entry opening 64b is also used). In the normal gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol is set so that a relatively long variation time (variation pattern such as reach) is easily selected. The game is configured to be easily played in the stored state, and even when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is stored, the variable display for the held ball is not started. Thereby, although the game state is unfavorable to the player, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the disadvantage that is disadvantageous to the player is suppressed.

  In the short-time gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time (30 seconds) (3 seconds). ) And the number of times of opening (2 times) are set to be larger than the opening time (0.5 seconds) and the number of times of opening (1 time) in normal times. In order to launch a game ball so that the game ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a left route through which the game ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a variable The right side of the display unit 80 is composed of two types, the right route through which the game ball passes, and a gate 67 is provided on both routes for the game ball as a trigger for starting a normal symbol. As a result, during the short-time gaming state, no matter how the game balls are fired, the normal symbol lottery is started, and the game balls are placed in the second entrance 64b rather than the first entrance 64a. Easy to enter the ball. Therefore, even during the short-time game, it is possible to suppress fraud that makes it possible to make a more advantageous jackpot by making a lottery with only the first special symbol.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, the game ball is easily inserted into the second entrance 64b, so that a prize ball equivalent to the launched game ball is easily paid out. The second entrance 64b It is designed to be a disadvantage to the player if it is not allowed to enter. Therefore, the player can inevitably play a game so as to enter the second entrance 64b, and can make it difficult to notice that the game is preferentially played with an unfavorable special symbol.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the second entrance 64b and the number of prize balls to be paid out increases, so that the game store can play game balls at the gate 67 in order to increase profits. It is conceivable to set the game nail so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 64b even when the game nail is set so that it is difficult for the player to pass through or when the electric accessory is activated. . However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 64b during the short-time game, the first special symbol is likely to start to change. Since the probability that the jackpot is determined to be 40 is high, even if there is a small fluctuation in the first special symbol, the jackpot will be determined by the first special symbol. Thereby, it becomes difficult for the game store side to adjust the game nail so as to make it difficult to enter the second entrance 64b, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that becomes an excessive disadvantage to the player. By configuring in this way, during the short-time game, even when the design is made with an effect that is assumed to be always drawn by the second special symbol, the effect is not performed as designed by the adjustment of the game store. Defects can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 31, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-off process in S1516 (see FIG. 27) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 27), it executes a power-off process in S1516. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1516 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1516 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1516, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1402: Yes), the current ramp-up process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process in S1516, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 27). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1516 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1411, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S1409 is that when the process from S1404 to S1406 is reached via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes in S1502 to S1510. In S1501, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not, because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effects), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variation display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1508 described later are set (S1503), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1505, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamps (Ds1, Ds2) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1507 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510), and the process proceeds to S1511. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1511, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1512 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1515), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). This command determination processing (S1511) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S 1511), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1602), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1603), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. If a variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 31) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The variable display hold count N1) in the symbol 1 or the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e (the variable display hold count N2 in the special symbol 2) is extracted, and this is extracted as the special symbol 1 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. It is stored in the number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S1608). In the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set.

  Here, since the ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1608. The value of 223c can be matched with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, a reserved ball number effect process for performing an effect based on the reserved ball number is executed (S1609). After the process of S1609 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the reserved ball number effect process (S1609) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number effect process (S1609). The reserved ball number effect process (S1609) is a process for performing an effect based on the reserved ball number extracted from the reserved ball number command received from the main controller 110 as described above.

  In the reserved ball number effect process (S1609), first, a display reserved ball number command is issued based on the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Set (S1701). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is short (S1702). Specifically, it is determined that the gaming state is being shortened from the time of receiving the jackpot start command from the main control device to the reception of the time reduction end command. The determination as to whether or not the gaming state is short may be configured by transmitting a command indicating that the time is short from the main control device, and may be determined based on whether or not the command is received.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1702 that the time is short (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is 2 or less (S1703). When it is determined that the value of N2 is 2 or less (S1703: Yes), a display command for blinking and displaying the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is set (S1704). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1703 that N2 is a value greater than 2 (S1703: No), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the non-priority reserved symbols are automatically set to the normal display mode when the number of reserved balls with priority variation becomes three or more in the processing of S1701. However, in the process of S1703, when it is determined that the value of N2 is greater than 2 (S1703: No), the blinking display of the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be canceled. Even when the first special symbol is prioritized, a command for canceling the blinking display of the second special symbol may be similarly set when it is determined No in the processing of S1705.

  In addition, the display control device 114 automatically sets a display data table in which all of the combination patterns of the reserved symbols (the combination patterns of the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are stored, and the priority variation is set. In the case where the number of reserved items is two or less, display data for blinking non-priority reserved symbols may be set in advance. By setting in this way, it is possible to omit the control for setting or canceling the blinking display by determining the number of holding by the sound lamp control device 113 or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is not short in the process of S1702 (S1702: No), it is determined whether the value of N1 is 2 or less (S1705). When it is determined that the value of N1 is 2 or less, a display command for blinking the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1706). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1705 that the value of N1 is greater than 2, this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. In the process of S1607, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1610). When a winning information command is received (S1610: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1611). The effect process is executed (S1612), and the process returns to the main process. In the process of S1611, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Details of the prefetch effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 64b, the value of the counter C1 is acquired by the main controller 110, and is acquired. The special symbol jackpot lottery is performed according to the values of the counter C1 and the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g, and the jackpot determination result is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. When the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and when the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is 0, special for low probability A special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the symbol jackpot random number table. When the main controller 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result obtained by prefetching is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. Note that the jackpot determination result of the special symbol obtained by prefetching is only a prediction, and may be provided separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery.

  Here, the prefetch effect process (S1612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect process (S1612). This pre-reading effect process (S1612) is a process for performing an effect based on the winning information extracted from the winning information command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  In the pre-reading effect process (S1612), first, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted from the received winning information command is a jackpot (S1801). When it is determined that the winning information is a jackpot (S1801: Yes), a one-notification effect for notifying the jackpot is set (S1802), and this process is terminated. With the setting of the one-shot notification effect, a sound for notifying the jackpot is output in the processing of S1509. It should be noted that, based on the setting of the one notification notification effect, the jackpot may be notified by the lamp output by the lamp output process of S1503, or a command corresponding to the one notification notification effect is provided in the RAM 223. In the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 27) that is stored in the command transmission ring buffer and executed by the MPU 221, it is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114, so that it is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. The jackpot may be notified by performing a display indicating that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1801 that the winning information is not a big hit (S1801: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the command determination process (S1511).

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1610 (S1610: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1613). When the jackpot start command is received (S1613: Yes), the display jackpot effect start command is set (S1614), the display hold display position replacement start command is set (S1615), and the process is terminated. . The display jackpot effect start command and the display hold display position replacement command set here are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and are output by the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221. In the process (S1502), it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot presentation start command, the display control device 114 starts the jackpot presentation at the third symbol display device 81, and when receiving the display hold display position replacement start command, the display control device 114 normally receives the display jackpot presentation start command. The information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 in Ds1 and the information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are replaced in Ds2, and the information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is displayed in Ds1, Information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is displayed on Ds2. Note that this display position switching may be performed at the start of the jackpot presentation or at the end of the jackpot presentation.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot start command has not been received in the processing of S1613 (S1613: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1616). When the round number command is received (S1616: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1617), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1618), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1616 (S1616: No), it is next determined whether or not a time-short end command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1619). If a time-short end command is received (S1619: Yes), a display hold position replacement end command is set (S1620), and this process ends. The display hold position replacement end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When a display hold display position replacement end command is received, information indicating the number of held balls of the special symbol 2 is displayed in Ds1, and is displayed in Ds2 by the display hold display position replacement start command for display in the third symbol display device 81. The replacement display with the information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is terminated, and information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1, which is a normal display, is set to Ds1, and the information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is displayed. Display on Ds2.

  By configuring in this way, the reserved symbol of the special symbol that is preferentially changed is always displayed on Ds1, so that the player can easily recognize the current priority change state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1619, when the special variation end start command is not received (S1619: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S1621), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted. Specific examples of other commands include the opening start command described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1902), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 27). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910.

  In the process of S1909, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, even if the gaming state is changed, the contents of the jackpot type drawn by the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are advantageous and disadvantageous. Was set immutable. However, the modification of the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the advantages and disadvantages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the modification of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 32, in the modification in the first embodiment, the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, respectively. Is set.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol is set so that either jackpot A or jackpot B is selected, and the second special symbol is selected as jackpot D or jackpot C. Is set. On the other hand, in the probabilistic gaming state, the first special symbol is set so that either the jackpot D or the jackpot C is selected, and in the second special symbol, either the jackpot A or the jackpot B is selected. Yes.

  Here, the jackpot A to jackpot C are the same as the contents of the jackpot described in the first embodiment. The jackpot D is different from the jackpot C only in that the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the normal gaming state, and the other configurations are the same.

  Here, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot A or jackpot C, which is a jackpot of 15 rounds, is selected as the first special symbol, and the ratio of setting the jackpot B in which the probability variation gaming state is set is 80%. It is the same as the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, the jackpot type to be selected is jackpot D and jackpot C configured in two rounds. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol is a special symbol that is more advantageous (more prize balls can be obtained) than the second special symbol for the player, and for the player, the first special symbol is It is advantageous to draw more.

  In the probability variation gaming state, the first special symbol is configured so that either the jackpot D or jackpot C, which is a two-round jackpot type, is set. In the second special symbol, the jackpot type of 15 rounds is set. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is selected. Even in the probability variation gaming state, the proportion of the probability variation gaming state given to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is both 80%. Therefore, when the game is in the probable gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to be drawn with the second special symbol than to be drawn with the first special symbol (more prize balls can be obtained). It is a special symbol, and it is advantageous for the player to draw more with the second special symbol.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first special symbol is preferentially changed in the non-time-saving normal game state. In addition, when playing normally, the first incoming ball so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is always stored so that there is no state where the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops and does not change. The winning rate for the mouth 64a and the variation time of the first special symbol are adjusted and set. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 64b does not start to fluctuate during the normal game state, and is carried over until it enters the short-time game state. As a result, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is configured not to start changing in the normal gaming state during non-time savings, but is likely to start changing during the probability change advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player tries to continue to play the game so that the change of the second special symbol does not start during the normal gaming state. Therefore, the game store side can improve game efficiency and increase profits.

  In addition, when shifting to a shorter time, the second special symbol is preferentially started to change. Here, when the jackpot is A, the game shifts to the short-time game in the normal probability state. In this case, it is preferentially changed with the second special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player. However, during the short-time game, it is a period during which it is easy to enter the second entrance 64b and the game can be played with almost no consumption of the possession ball. Playing games with the expectation that any dissatisfaction will be alleviated and that anyway it should be. Thereby, even if the jackpot is awarded without consuming the holding ball, it is possible to reduce the damage on the game shop side and suppress the problem that the profit of the game shop is excessively reduced.

  In addition, in the short time in the probability variation game, since it is preferentially changed with the second special symbol advantageous to the player, it is possible to further increase the profit to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game in anticipation of shifting to a probabilistic game, and can suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of shifting to the probability variation game is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantage and disadvantage may be set differently. . Furthermore, you may set so that a ratio may differ further with game states.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the special symbol that is preferentially started to change is configured to be changed according to the gaming state. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed. The state in which the variation is executed simultaneously with the symbol and the state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed are different from the configuration of the first embodiment in that the state is changed depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIGS. 33-34, the structure of the game board 13 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. The second embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b are added to the sorting unit 640, and the right second entrance 64b2 is added, so that the variable winning device 65 is provided. It differs from the structure of 1st Embodiment by the point provided below the right side 2nd entrance 64b2. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The distribution unit 640 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 34A and 34B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 640. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front surface side, and the cover body is made of a member that can be seen through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  In the upper part of the sorting unit 640, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type ball entrance sensor 640a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage opening is disposed. . The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entry opening 64a and the second entry opening 64b that are disposed below.

  The sorting member 900 receives the entered game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 640a, the sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball as viewed from the front (see FIG. 34A), and the game ball is moved to the first entrance port. Guide to 64a. Here, each of the sorting members 900 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees in the left and right directions, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 640, the magnet 901b of the sorting member 900 is disposed at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 is located at a position where the sorting member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b is located directly above (on the center line of a space where a game ball at the passage opening can be inserted by about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), there is no stopping at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly upwards. It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the sorting member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, so that the sorting member 900 is either left or right. It rotates and either of the accommodating part 900a or the accommodating part 900b turns to the side (game machine upper side) which receives the game ball which enters the distribution unit 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900b and causing a ball clogging.

  Further, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, after the housing portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, the storage portion 900b is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is received by the storage portion 900b. The sorting member 900 rotates about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second entrance 64b. As described above, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting unit 640 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls equally to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b, and to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as the first entrance 64a, which will be described later). The first lottery game) and the lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second entrance 64b can be efficiently executed.

  The right second entrance 64b2 is an entrance where the lottery of the second special symbol will be started when a game ball enters in the same manner as the second entrance 64b. In the second special symbol, the number of the holding balls is four, including the second entrance 64b and the right second entrance 64b2.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed through the left side can enter the passage port of the sorting unit 640, and the right second entrance port 64b2 has a right side. Only game balls that have passed through are configured to be able to enter.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 35, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b and the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 35A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, in the normal gaming state, either the big win D or the big win E is selected with the same lottery ratio in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, there is no advantage or disadvantage in the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the first special symbol is set so that either the big hit F or big hit G is selected, and in the second special symbol, either the big hit H or big hit I is selected. Has been.

  Here, for the jackpot D and jackpot E, jackpots similar to the jackpot A and jackpot B in the first embodiment are executed. The jackpot F and jackpot G are two rounds of jackpot. When the jackpot is F, a promiscuous gaming state is given after the jackpot game, and when the jackpot is G, the game is shifted to the normal gaming state. Both jackpots F and G are not given short-time games. On the other hand, jackpots H and I are jackpots similar to jackpot A and jackpot B. Thus, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol is more advantageous than the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state and the short time gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn at the same time in the non-time-saving normal game state, and the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b are alternately efficient. Since game balls are often inserted, it is possible to allow a player to play a game efficiently and fairly without giving an advantage or disadvantage depending on the type of special symbol.

  On the other hand, during the probability variation gaming state and the short-time game, the player mainly executes the right-handed game aiming at the right second entrance 64b, so the rate of entering the second entrance 64b is high. . In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely shorter than that of the second special symbol during the probabilistic game and in the short time, so that the variation of the second special symbol can be increased in a short time. . Therefore, it is possible to make a lottery game with the second special symbol that is more advantageous to the player, and to give more profit to the player.

  In addition, during the probability change and in the short time, the lottery game can be performed under advantageous conditions by switching the second special symbol so that the second special symbol is changed with priority.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of jackpot type to which the probability variation game is given is the same between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the ratio is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different. You may comprise.

  Specifically, during the probability change, in the short time, in the first special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot type to which the probability variation gaming state and the normal gaming state are given at a rate of 50% is selected, and in the second special symbol, It is set so that the probability variation game is selected at a rate of 100%. With this setting, the rate of selection of the second special symbol is set to 70% at 0.1 seconds by lottery, and the rate of selection at 3 seconds is selected at 25% and 10 seconds. Keep the percentage at 5%. By configuring in this way, the longer the 0.1 second variation time is selected, the faster the reserved special digest time of the second special symbol becomes, the easier the first special symbol variation starts, and the probability variation gaming state ends. There is a high risk of doing so. On the other hand, by selecting a variation time of 10 seconds, it becomes easier to save the hold of the second special symbol, and it is possible to set a high possibility that the probability variation game will be continued.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to generate a jackpot efficiently in a short period of time by changing simultaneously, and during the probability change, either of the special symbols will change whether or not the probability change game can be continued. Can provide a player with innovative gameplay.

  If the percentage of probability change is changed depending on the game state, winning a prize during the jackpot will set the big prize opening to which the probability change will be given and the normal big prize opening. This may be realized by configuring which large winning a prize opening is opened.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 36, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 (S107) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S107). The special symbol variation process 2 (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2, it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S2001). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S2001: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether or not the time is short (S2002). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0, and when the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0, it is determined that the hour / hour counter is being shorter.
If it is determined by the process of S2002 that the time is short (S2002: Yes), the time-short fluctuation process (S2003) is executed. This short-to-middle fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not short (S2002: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 is changing (S2004). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 is fluctuating (S2004: Yes), the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 is executed (S2005), and if it is determined that the special symbol 1 is not fluctuating (S2004: No), the special symbol 1 is changed. The symbol 1 fluctuation stop process is executed (S2006). The special symbol 1 variation start process (S2005) and the special symbol 1 stop process (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing (S2007). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is changing (S2007: Yes), the special symbol 2 change start process is executed (S2008). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is not changing (S2007: No), the special symbol 2 is changed. (2) A fluctuation stop process is executed (S2009). The special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S2008) and the special symbol 2 stop process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44.

  When the process of S2001, S2003, S2008, or S2009 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S2003) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S2003). This special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S2003) is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and the variation of the special symbol 1 is based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (N1). It is a process for performing control which starts.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is acquired (S2101), and the value of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is greater than zero. It is determined whether or not (S2102). When the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is 0 (S2102: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is larger than 0 (S2102: Yes), processing for starting the variation of the special symbol 1 is executed (S2103 to S2106).

  Specifically, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is decremented by 1 (S2103), and the data in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a is shifted (S2104). In the process of S2104, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. Next, a special symbol 1 big hit determination process is executed (S2105), a special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is executed (S2106), and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S2105) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S2105). The special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S2105) is executed in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol 1 is lottery based on the data of the special symbol 1 holding ball execution area 203a. This is a process for setting according to the result.

  In the special symbol 1 big hit determination process, first, data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball execution area 203a is acquired (S2201). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S2202). If it is determined that the probability is changing (S2202: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. However, if it is determined that there is no probability change (S2202: No), a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S2204). Here, whether or not the probability change is in progress is determined based on whether or not the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0. If the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0, it is determined that the probability change is in progress. If it is 0, it is determined that there is no probability change.

  After the process of S2203 or S2204, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203k is on (S2205). The jackpot flag 203k is turned on when either of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined to be a jackpot. Here, if the special symbol 2 for which a change is being performed is a big hit, the jackpot flag 203k is turned on, so the special symbol 2 is a big hit before the special symbol 1 is set as a big hit. It can be determined whether or not there is.

  When it is determined in the process of S2205 that the big hit flag 203k is on (S2205: Yes), the off symbol of the special symbol 1 is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S2210). Here, when the jackpot flag 203k is ON, the symbol out of the special symbol 1 is set, so that it is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring simultaneously with the special symbol 2 in which the fluctuation is being performed at the same time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2205 that the jackpot flag 203k is not on (S2205: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S2206), and when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot ( (S2206: Yes), the jackpot is set for the special symbol 1 (S2207 to S2209), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not a big jackpot (S2206: No), the off symbol of the special symbol 1 is set on the first symbol display device 37. (S2210).

  In the jackpot setting for the special symbol 1 (S2207 to S2209), the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON for the special symbol 1 (S2207), the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is set to the jackpot (S2208) and acquired. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 1 displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S2209). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2201 is compared with the random value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the special symbol big hit (big hit D, big hit E, jackpot F, jackpot G), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49” at normal time when neither the probability change nor the time is short, it is determined that the jackpot D (15R probability change big hit) is “50 to 99”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the jackpot E is determined to be jackpot E (15R normal jackpot). It is determined that it is F (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that it is jackpot G (2R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 35A). When the process of S2209 or S2210 is completed, this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S2106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S2106). The special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S2106) is executed in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (see FIG. 37), and is a process for setting a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special symbol 1. .

  In the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is a big hit (S2301). When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is a jackpot (S2301: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S2302), and the jackpot type table is selected based on the jackpot type. (S2303). on the other hand,. When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is not a big hit (S2301: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S2304).

  When the processing of S2303 or S2304 is finished, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S2305), and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S2306). Based on the variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203o (S2307), and this processing is terminated. The special figure 1 variation pattern command generated in the process of S2206 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern command, it transmits the display fluctuation pattern command to the display control apparatus 114 (see S1904 in FIG. 31). The display control device 114 displays a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command for display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process (S2006) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation stopping process (S2006). This special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process (S2006) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

  In the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is on (S2401). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is on (S2401: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is turned off (S2413), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is turned off. 1 Fluctuation stop command is set (S2414), and this process ends. The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is set to ON when the special figure 2 is a big hit at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. Thereby, when the big hit game of special figure 2 is started, the fluctuation | variation of special figure 1 which is changing simultaneously can be stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is not on (S2401: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203o is subtracted and updated (S2402), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is over. (S2403). Whether or not the variable time is over is determined by whether or not the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203o is 0. If the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203o is 0, the variable time is over. judge.

  If it is determined in S2403 that it is not the end of the variation time (S2403: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable time is over (S2403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is turned on for the special figure 1 (S2404). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is turned on for the special figure 1 (S2404: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is set to on (S2405), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned on. Is set (S2406), and a jackpot start is set (S2407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not on for the special figure 1 (S2404: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero (S2408), and the hour / minute counter 203h is zero. If it is larger (S2408: Yes), the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S2409), and if the hour / hour counter 203h is zero (S2408: No), the process of S2409 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2410. .

  When the processing of S2407, S2408, or S2409 is completed, the special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S2410), the fluctuation of special symbol 1 of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2411), and the time-shortage counter 203h is reset. (S2412), this process ends.

  Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S2006) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S2006). This special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S2006) is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and the variation of the special symbol 2 based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2). It is a process for performing control which starts.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process 2, first, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is acquired (S2501), and the acquired value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S2502). If the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S2502: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is larger than 0 (S2502: Yes), processing for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed (S2503 to S2506).

  Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is decremented by 1 (S2503), and the data in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b is shifted (S2504). In the process of S2104, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. Next, a special symbol 2 big hit determination process is executed (S2505), a special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process is executed (S2506), and this process ends.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S2505) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S2505). The special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S2505) is executed in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 41), and the special symbol 2 is lottery based on the data of the special symbol 2 holding ball execution area 203b. This is a process for setting according to the result.

  In the special symbol 2 big hit determination process, first, data of the special symbol 2 reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S2601). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S2602). If it is determined that the probability is changing (S2602: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. If it is determined that there is no probability change (S2602: No), a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S2604). Here, whether or not the probability change is in progress is determined based on whether or not the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0. If the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0, it is determined that the probability change is in progress. If it is 0, it is determined that there is no probability change.

  After the processing of S2603 or S2604, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is on (S2605). The jackpot flag 203k is turned on when either of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined to be a jackpot. Here, if the special symbol 1 that is changing at the same time is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203k is turned on. Therefore, before setting the jackpot for the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 is a jackpot. It can be determined whether or not there is.

  When it is determined in the processing of S2605 that the big hit flag 203k is on (S2605: Yes), the off symbol of the special symbol 2 is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S2610). Here, when the jackpot flag 203k is on, the symbol out of the special symbol 2 is set, so that it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being made at the same time as the special symbol 1 in which the change is being performed at the same time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not on in the processing of S2605 (S2605: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S2606), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot ( (S2606: Yes), the jackpot is set for the special symbol 2 (S2607 to S2609), and when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit (S2606: No), the off symbol of the special symbol 2 is set on the first symbol display device 37. (S2610).

  In the jackpot setting for the special symbol 2 (S2607 to S2609), the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON for the special symbol 2 (S2607), the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is set to the jackpot (S2608) and acquired. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 2 displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S2609). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2601 is compared with the random value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the special symbol big hit (big hit D, big hit E, jackpot H, jackpot I) and the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49” at normal time when neither the probability change nor the time is short, it is determined that the jackpot D (15R probability change big hit) is “50 to 99”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the jackpot E is determined to be jackpot E (15R normal jackpot). H (15R probability variation jackpot) is determined, and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that jackpot I (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 35A). When the process of S2609 or S2610 is completed, this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S2506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection processing (S2506). This special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S2506) is executed in the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 41), and is a process for setting a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special symbol 2.

  In the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a big hit (S2701). When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S2701: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S2702), and the jackpot type table is selected based on the jackpot type. (S2703). on the other hand,. When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is not a big hit (S2701: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S2304).

  When the processing of S2703 or S2704 is finished, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S2705), and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S2706). Based on the variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203p (S2707), and this processing is terminated. The special figure 2 variation pattern command generated in the process of S2706 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command, it transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 (see S1904 in FIG. 31). The display control device 114 displays a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command for display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process (S2007) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process (S2007). This special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process (S2007) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

  In the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is on (S2801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is on (S2801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned off (S2813), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned off. A two-variation stop command is set (S2814), and this process ends. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is set to ON when the special figure 1 is a big hit at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Thereby, when the jackpot game of special figure 1 is started, the fluctuation | variation of special figure 2 which is fluctuating simultaneously can be stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is not on (S2801: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203p is subtracted and updated (S2802), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is over. (S2803). Whether or not the end of the variable time is determined by whether or not the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203p is 0. If the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203p is 0, the variable time is ended. judge.

  If it is determined in the process of S2803 that the variable time has not ended (S2803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time is over (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203k is turned on for the special figure 2 (S2804). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is on for the special figure 2 (S2804: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203m is set to on (S2805), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating on is displayed. Is set (S2806), and the start of jackpot is set (S2807).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not on for the special figure 2 (S2804: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero (S2808), and the hour / minute counter 203h is zero. If it is larger (S2808: Yes), the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S2809), and if the hour / hour counter 203h is 0 (S2808: No), the process of S2809 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2810. .

  When the processing of S2807, S2808, or S2809 is completed, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S2810), the special symbol 1 of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing (S2811), and the time-shortage counter 203h is reset. (S2812), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the short-to-middle fluctuation processing (S2003) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the time change processing (S2003). The short / middle fluctuation process (S2003) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 36), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 during the time reduction.

  In each of the processes of S202 to S203, S206 to S209, and S211 to S225 in the short / middle fluctuation process, the same process as the above-described special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. And in the main process in 2nd Embodiment, it replaces with the process of S204-S205 and S210 in 1st Embodiment, and the process of S226-S227 is performed.

  Specifically, after acquiring the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S203) by the process of S203, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls It is determined whether the value (N2) of the counter 203e is greater than 0 (S226). When it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S226: Yes), the processing of S211 to S214 for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is executed (S211 to S214). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S226: No), whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0. Is determined (S227). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S227: No), this processing is terminated as it is, and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is When it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S227: Yes), the processing of S206 to S209 for starting the variation of the special symbol 1 is executed (S206 to S209), and this processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the normal gaming state is assumed to be simultaneous variation, and the probability variation gaming state is regarded as priority variation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation and time reduction may be simultaneously varied, and the normal gaming state may be regarded as priority variation.

  Further, the first embodiment and the second embodiment may be combined to change the first special symbol priority, the second special symbol priority, and the simultaneous variation by lottery. For example, after two rounds of big hits and small wins, the second special symbol priority may be configured for simultaneous fluctuation, probability change, and time reduction, and the first special symbol priority may be configured for normal times. What is given priority may be designed as appropriate.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristics A group> (Special figure priority change (per value remains unchanged))
First information is obtained based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and entering the first entrance, Information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and establishment of a lottery condition based on the first information or the second information acquired by the information acquisition means Lottery means for executing lottery when triggered, information storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery A display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by means, and a bonus game grant for giving a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having means, the lottery means When the lottery is determined with the specific lottery result, the type of the bonus game is determined, and when the lottery is based on the entrance to the first entrance, the entrance to the second entrance Based on the bonus game determination means for determining the bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than in the case of the lottery based on, and the establishment of the predetermined condition, it is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state When the normal game state is set by the state setting means for setting one of the special game state and the state setting means, the game ball is placed at the second entrance than the first entrance. An entry that is set in a state in which it is difficult to enter a ball and is set in a state in which a game ball is easier to enter the second entrance than in the first entrance when the special game state is set. The normal gaming state is set by the auxiliary means and the state setting means. In this case, the first information stored in the information storage means is preferentially set to be drawn by the lottery means, and the second information is set when the special gaming state is set. A gaming machine A1 having priority setting means for setting the lottery means so as to be preferentially drawn.

  The gaming machine A1 has the following effects. That is, when a lottery means and a specific lottery result are drawn, the bonus game type is determined by the bonus game determining means, and when the lottery is based on the entrance to the first entrance, the second entry The type of privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than in the case of the lottery based on the entrance into the mouth is determined by the privilege game determination means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, either the normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means. When the normal game state is set by the state setting means, the second entrance is set by the entrance assistant means so that the game ball is less likely to enter than the first entrance, and the special game state is set. When it is set, the second entrance is set to a state where the game entrance is easier to enter than the first entrance by the entrance assisting means. When the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means, the first setting information is set by the priority setting means so that the first information stored in the information storage means is preferentially drawn by the lottery means, and the special gaming state is set. If it is set, the priority setting means sets the second information so that the second information is preferentially drawn by the lottery means. As a result, information that is preferentially varied depending on the gaming state can be varied. Therefore, a fresh game can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A1, the entry assisting means includes a first state in which the game ball is guided to the second entrance and a second state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance. A game machine A2 comprising: a movable piece that can be moved to the first position; and variable means for changing the movable piece between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the entrance assisting means, the game ball is guided to the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the first state. On the other hand, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the second state. The movable piece is changed between the first state and the second state by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to easily enter the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the special gaming state has a higher probability that the lottery means and the specific lottery result and the probability of lottery is set than the normal gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the special gaming state, the probability of being drawn by the lottery means and the specific lottery result is set higher than in the normal gaming state. There is an effect that the interest in games can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games, and the number of small privilege games is less than the first privilege game and the first privilege game as the type of the privilege game. The second bonus game is set at least, and when the special gaming state is set, the second information is configured so that the second bonus game is easily determined. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games. As a type of privilege game, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game with fewer small privilege games than the first privilege game are set. When the special game state is set, the second bonus game is easily determined for the second information. Thereby, a player can be expected to be drawn by the first information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics B group> (Special figure priority change (value per win changes with priority change))
First information is obtained based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and entering the first entrance, Information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and establishment of a lottery condition based on the first information or the second information acquired by the information acquisition means Lottery means for executing lottery when triggered, information storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery Display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the means, and a bonus game grant for giving a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means A certain condition is established in a gaming machine having means Based on the state setting means for setting either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and when the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means When the game ball is set to be harder to enter the second entrance than the first entrance and is set to the special game state, the game ball is placed in the second entrance. As a type of the bonus game given by the entrance assisting means set to be easier to enter than the first entrance and the bonus game granting means, a first bonus game and its first bonus game The type determination means for determining one of the second privilege games that are more advantageous to the player, and the lottery for the one information than the lottery for the second information in the normal gaming state Than the first privilege game. When the 2 privilege game is easily determined by the type determining means and is in the special game state, the lottery for the second information is more than the lottery for the second information than the first privilege game. In the case where a normal variable game state is set by the determination variable means for making the second privilege game easy to be determined by the type determination means and the state setting means, the first information stored in the information storage means is given priority. Priority setting means for setting the lottery means to be selected by lottery means, and when the special gaming state is set, priority setting means for giving priority to the second information to be selected by the lottery means; A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising:

  The gaming machine B1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, either the normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means, and the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means. When the second entrance is set to a state where it is harder for the game ball to enter than the first entrance by the entrance assisting means, and the special entrance state is set, the second entrance The entrance is set by the entrance assisting means so that the game ball is easier to enter than the first entrance. As the type of privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, one of the first privilege game and the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is decided by the type determining means. . In the normal gaming state, the determination or piece means makes it easier for the type determination means to determine the second privilege game than the first privilege game for the lottery for the first information rather than the lottery for the second information. . On the other hand, when the game state is in the special game state, the type determination means determines the second privilege game rather than the first privilege game for the lottery for the second information rather than the lottery for the first information by the decision or one means. Made easier. When the normal gaming state is set by the state setting means, the priority setting means sets the first information stored in the information storage means so as to be drawn by the lottery means. Further, when the special game state is set by the state setting means, the priority setting means is set so that the second information is preferentially drawn by the lottery means. As a result, information that is preferentially varied depending on the gaming state can be varied. Therefore, a fresh game can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine B1, the entrance assisting means includes a first state in which the game ball is guided to the second entrance and a second state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance. A game machine B2 comprising: a movable piece that can be moved to the first position; and variable means for changing the movable piece between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the entrance assisting means, the game ball is guided to the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the first state. On the other hand, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance by the movable piece movable to the second state. The movable piece is changed between the first state and the second state by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to easily enter the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the special gaming state is set such that the probability of being drawn by the lottery means and the specific lottery result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, in the special gaming state, the probability of being drawn by the lottery means and the specific lottery result is set higher than in the normal gaming state. There is an effect that the interest in games can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the privilege game is configured by a plurality of small privilege games, and the number of the small privilege games is less than the first privilege game and the first privilege game as the type of the privilege game. When the second bonus game is set at least and the normal gaming state is set, the first bonus is easily determined with respect to the first information, and the special gaming state is If set, the gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the first bonus game is easily determined for the second information.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games. As a type of privilege game, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game with fewer small privilege games than the first privilege game are set. When the special game state is set, the second bonus game is easily determined for the second information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic C group> (Switch between simultaneous fluctuation state and priority fluctuation)
First information is obtained based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and entering the first entrance, Information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and establishment of a lottery condition based on the first information or the second information acquired by the information acquisition means Lottery means for executing lottery when triggered, information storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery Display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the means, and a bonus game grant for giving a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having means, the lottery means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result based on the first information and the identification information indicating the lottery result based on the second information on the display means; Based on the establishment of the condition, state setting means for setting either the first gaming state or a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is set by the state setting means Based on that, a simultaneous lottery state is established in which the lottery conditions for the first information and the second information are simultaneously established, and the first information and the second information are based on the fact that the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine C1 comprising: lottery state setting means for setting a priority lottery state in which one of the lottery conditions is preferentially established among the second information.

  The gaming machine C1 has the following effects. That is, identification information indicating the lottery result based on the first information by the lottery means and identification information indicating the lottery result based on the second information are dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, either the first gaming state or a second gaming state different from the first gaming state is set by the state setting means. Based on the setting of the first gaming state by the state setting means, a simultaneous lottery state in which the lottery conditions for the first information and the second information are simultaneously satisfied is set by the lottery state setting means, and the second state is set. Based on this, the lottery state setting means sets a priority lottery state in which one of the first information and the second information is preferentially established. Thereby, the player can provide a game with a fresh taste by changing the period during which the game is efficiently executed and the period during which one of the fluctuations is preferentially changed by simultaneously changing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the state setting means sets the second gaming state, the gaming machine C1 is set to enter a state in which a gaming ball is easier to enter the second entrance than the first entrance. A gaming machine C2 having ball assisting means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1, when the second game state is set by the state setting means, the second entrance is more than the first entrance by the entrance assisting means. Since the game ball is set in a state where it is easy to enter, there is an effect that the player can expect a state where it is easy to win the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine C2, the lottery state setting means sets the priority lottery state so that the lottery condition of the second information is preferentially established when the second game state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being set.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C2, when the second gaming state is set by the state setting means, the lottery state setting is performed so that the lottery condition of the second information is preferentially established. Since the priority lottery state is set by the means, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the second gaming state is configured to give a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the state setting means includes the lottery means A gaming machine C4, which determines one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the fact that the specific lottery result is drawn.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than in the first gaming state is given. Based on the fact that the lottery means has drawn a lottery result, either the first game state or the second game state is determined by the state setting means. Thereby, it can be expected that the player is set to the second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the game machine C4 includes dynamic display time determining means for determining a time for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means from a plurality of times, and the dynamic display determining means is set in the second gaming state. When this is done, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is easier to determine a longer dynamic display time by using the lottery result for the second information as a dynamic display of the identification information than in the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the time for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means is determined from a plurality of times by the dynamic display determination means. Also, when the second gaming state is set, the dynamic display time is longer than the time when the identification information indicating the lottery result for the second information is dynamically displayed compared to when the first gaming state is set. It is easy to be determined by the automatic display time determination means. Thereby, a game more advantageous to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st entrance means 64b 2nd entrance means 81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
203 RAM (information storage means)
S105 Information acquisition means S204 Priority setting means S402 Part of discrimination means S403 Part of privilege game determination means

Claims (2)

A first entrance where a game ball can enter and a second entrance different from the first entrance;
Information acquisition means for acquiring first information based on entering the first entrance and acquiring second information based on entering the second entrance;
Lottery means for executing lottery when the lottery condition is established based on the first information or the second information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Information storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied,
Display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means;
In the gaming machine having privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means,
A state setting means for setting either a normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the normal game state is set by the state setting means, the game ball is set to be less likely to enter the second ball entrance than the first ball entrance, and is set to the special game state. And a ball entry assisting means configured so that a game ball can enter the second ball entrance more easily than the first ball entrance,
Type determining means for determining either the first privilege game or the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the type of the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means. When,
In the case of the normal gaming state, the type determination means makes it easier for the second privilege game to be determined than the first privilege game for the lottery for the one information rather than the lottery for the second information, In the case of the special game state, the type determining means makes the second privilege game easier to determine by the type determination means than the first privilege game for the lottery for the second information rather than the lottery for the first information. Variable decision means;
When the normal game state is set by the state setting means, the first information stored in the information storage means is set to be selected by the lottery means with priority, and the special game state is When set, the gaming machine has priority setting means for setting the second information so that the lottery means wins priority. The entrance assisting means is
A movable piece movable between a first state in which a game ball is guided to the second entrance and a second state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance;
Variable means for changing the movable piece between the first state and the second state;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:

Images